ADMINISTRATION 


MILITARY  LAW 


FIELD 
SERVICE  REGULATIONS 


MARCHES  AND  CONVOYS 


BY 

CAPT.  W.  H.  WALDRON 

29th  infantry 


Reprinted  from 
"NIGHT  OPERATIONS" 
Infantry  Journal 

January,  February, 

March,  April, 
May  and  June,  1917 


WASHINGTON 

United  States  Infantry  Association 

1917 


b'l^ 


> 


.^ 


<p 


<^ 


v 


Night  Operations 


A  Department  devoted  to  the  interest  of  newly-commissioned  Infantry  officers, 
officers  of  the  Infantry  Officers'  Reserve  Corps  and  candidates  for  commission. 

Conducted  by  Capt.  W.  H.  Waldron,  29th  Infantry 

Administration 


Q.  What  is  Military  Rank? 

A.  Military  rank  is  that  character  or  quality 
bestowed  on  military  persons  which 
marks  their  station,  and  confers  eligi- 
bility to  exercise  command  or  authority 
in  the  military  service  within  the  limits 
prescribed  by  law.  It  is  divided  into 
degrees  or  grades,  which  mark  the  rela- 
tive positions  and  powers  of  the  differ- 
ent classes  of  persons  possessing  it.  (7)* 

Q.  What  determines  the  order  of  precedence 
of  officers  in  the  military  service? 

A.  In  each  grade  or  sub-grade,  the  date  of 
commission,  appointment  or  warrant  de- 
termines the  order  of  precedence.  (9) 

Q:  Command  exercised  is  by  virtue  of  what? 

A.  By  virtue  of  office  and  the  special  assign- 
ment of  officers  holding  military  rank, 
who  are  eligible  by  law  to  exercise 
command.  (13) 

Q.  May  an  oiEcer  place  himself  on  duty  by 
virtue  of  his  commission  alone? 

A.  No  officer  may  place  himself  on  duty 
without  orders  from  competent  author- 
ity except  when  it  may  be  necessary 
to  exercise  the  functions  of  his  office  to 
quell  quarrels,  frays  and  disorders 
among  troops  (old  24th  Article  of 
War)  ;  or,  when  upon  marches,  guards, 
or  in  quarters,  different  corps  of  the 
army  happen  to  join  or  do  duty  to- 
gether, when  the  highest  ranking  officer 
of  the  line  of  the  army  present  assumes 
command  of  the  whole  (old  122d  Arti- 
cle of  War).  (13) 

Q.  What  are  the  appropriate  commands  for 
oiHcers  of  the  several  grades? 

A.  1.  For  a  captain,  a  company. 

2.  For  a  major,  a  battalion. 

3.  For  a  colonel,  a  regiment. 

4.  For  a  brigadier-general,  a  brigade. 

*  Numbers   refer   to   paragraphs   in   Army 
Regulations. 


5.  For  a  major-general,  a  division.  (14) 

Q.  What  is  the  status  of  an  officer  who  suc- 
ceeds another  to  any  command  or  duty? 

A.  He  assumes  the  exact  status  of  his  prede- 
cessor. He  will  receive  all  the  orders 
in  force  at  the  time ;  receive,  receipt  for 
and  assume  responsibility  and  accounta- 
bility for  all  property  and  funds  per- 
taining to  his  command  or  duty.     (17) 

Q.  May  an  officer  of  the  Staff  Departments 
command  troops? 

A.  An  officer  of  the  Staff  Departments, 
whether  he  be  one  of  the  permanent 
officers  or  one  detailed  for  duty  therein, 
is  eligible,  by  virtue  of  his  commission, 
to  command  all  enlisted  men,  but  he 
cannot  assume  command  of  troops  un- 
less placed  on  duty  under  orders  which 
specifically  direct  that  it  is  done  by 
authority  of  tht  President.     (18) 

Q.  Before  whom  may  an  officer  of  the  Army 
take  his  oath  of  office? 

A.  1.  Before  any  officer  who  is  authorized 
by  the  laws  of  the  United  States  or  by 
local  municipal  law  to  administer  oaths : 
Notary  Public,  Justice  of  the  Peace, 
Clerks  of  Courts,  etc. 

2.  A  Department  Judge  Advocate. 

3.  The  Judge  Advocate  of  a  General  or 
Special  Court  Martial. 

4.  The  trial  officer  of  a  Summary 
Court.     (23) 

Q.  What  qualiffcations  must  a  civilian  possess 
for  appointment  as  Second  Lieutenant 
in  the  Army? 

A.  1.  He  must  be  unmarried. 

2.  He  must  be  between  the  ages  of  21  and 
27  years. 

3.  He  must  be  approved  as  to  moral  char- 
acter, habits,  mental  and  physical  abil- 
ity, education  and  general  fitness  for  the 
service. 

4.  He  must  pass  the  physical  examination 
required  of  recruits  for  admission  to  the 


374383 


2        •: i • /) j'i O'**^ . i  'K i ght   Operations 


Regular  Army,  and  the  mental  examina- 
tion prescribed  in  general  orders  issued 
from  the  War  Department  covering  the 
subj  ect. 

5.  No  person  will  be  examined  by  a  board 
of  officers  unless  he  has  a  letter  from 
the  War  Department  authorizing  such 
examination. 

6.  If  the  candidate  has  graduated  from  an 
institution  where  he  received  military 
instruction,  he  must  present  a  diploma 
or  a  recommendation  from  the  faculty 
of  the  institution. 

7.  If  the  candidate  is  a  member  of  the 
Organized  Militia,  he  must  present 
recommendations  from  the  proper 
authorities  thereof.  (34-35) 

Q.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  "  Manchu 
Law"r 

A.  The  "  Manchu  Law "  provides  that  no 
officer  of  the  line  of  the  Army  may  be 
detached  from  duty  with  troops  for 
more  than  four  years  out  of  six ;  that  is, 
all  officers  of  the  line  of  the  Army  must 
serve  with  troops  for  at  least  two  years 
out  of  every  six  years.     (40) 

Q.  What  are  the  regulations  governing  the 
granting  of  leaves  of  absence  to  oMcers 
of  the  Army? 

A.  1.  Post  commanders  and  officers  having  a 
similar  status  may  grant  leaves  for  one 
month. 

2.  Commanders  of  territorial  departments, 
tactical  divisions  and  separate  brigades 
may  grant  leaves  for  four  months,  or 
extend  for  that  period  leaves  granted 
by  their  subordinate  commanders. 

3.  Chiefs  of  bureaus  may  grant  leaves  of 
four  months  to  officers  of  their  respec- 
tive corps  serving  under  their  immediate 
direction,  or  extend  to  that  period  those 
already  granted  to   such  officers. 

4.  Leaves  of  absence  for  three  months 
from  date  of  graduation  are  allowed 
graduates  of  the  Military  Academy. 

5.  Leaves  of  absence  will  not  be  granted 
so  that  a  company  will  be  left  without 
a  commissioned  officer,  or  a  post  with- 
out two  commissioned  officers  and  com- 
petent medical  attendance. 

6.  Leaves  will  not  be  granted  during  the 
period  of  active  military  operations  ex- 
cept in  cases  of  urgent  necessity. 

7.  Except  under  extraordinary  circum- 
stances an  officer  will  not  be  granted 
a  leave  exceeding  ten  days  until  after 


he  has  joined  and  served  with  his  organ- 
ization for  at  least  two  years. 

8.  A  sick  leave  of  absence  is  granted  only 
on  the  recommendation  of  a  medical 
officer,  after  a  thorough  examination  of 
the  officer  and  a  report  completely  cov- 
ering the  case  in  question.  Sick  leaves 
do  not  count  against  an  officer's  leave 
privileges. 

9.  Leaves  are  granted  in  periods  of  months 
and  days  as  "  one  month  " ;  "  one  month 
and  ten  days,"  etc. 

10.  A  leave  commences  on  the  day  follow- 
ing that  on  which  the  officer  departs 
from  his  station.  The  day  of  departure 
is  counted  as  a  day  of  duty  and  the  day 
of  return  as  a  day  of  absence. 

n.  Officers  oji  leave  of  absence  are  not 
allowed  to  go  beyond  the  sea  without 
the  special  permission  of  the  authority 
granting  the  leave,  or  permission  from 
higher  authority. 

12.  Permission  to  hunt  is  not  counted 
against  an  officer's  leave  period,  pro- 
vided he  submits  a  report  containing  a 
full  description  of  the  country  traversed 
while  hunting. 

13.  By  custom  of  the  service  the  leave  year 
extends  from  July  1st  to  the  succeeding 
June  30th.  An  officer  is  entitled  to 
thirty  days'  leave  a  year.  This  leave 
period  may  be  allowed  to  accumulate 
for  a  period  of  four  years. 

14.  All  correspondence  relating  to  leaves, 
their  extension  and  application  for  de- 
lays, is  required  to  pass  through  the 
prescribed  military  channels. 

15.  Verbal  permits  for  an  absence  of  less 
than  24  hours  are  not  counted  as  leaves 
and  are  not  noted  against  an  officer  on 
the  rolls  and  returns.  (49  to  66) 

Q.  What  action  is  required  of  an  oMcer  when 
he  takes  advantage  of  a  leave  of  absence 
granted  to  him? 

A.  He  writes  letters  to  (a)  His  post  or  regi- 
mental commander;  (&)  the  authority 
granting  the  leave  when  the  latter  is 
other  than  the  post  or  regimental  com- 
mander; (c)  to  the  Adjutant-General 
of  the  Army,  War  Department,  Wash- 
ington, D.  C. ;  containing  the  following 
information : 

1.  The  date  of  departure  on  leave. 

2.  The  address  where  correspondence 
will  reach  him. 


Night  Operations 


The  body  of  this  letter  would  read  as 
follows : 

1.  I  have  this  16th  day  of  October, 

1916,  taken  advantage  of  leave 
of  absence  for  one  month  and 
twenty  days  granted  by  para- 
graph 18,  Special  Orders  No. 
224,  c.  s.  (current  series)  East- 
ern Department. 

2.  My  address  during  the  period  of 

this  leave  will  be 

543-142d  Street, 
New  York  City, 
John  Doe. 
Any  change  in  the  address  will  be  re- 
ported promptly  to  the  same  authori- 
ties.   On  return  to  duty  a  letter  will 
be  addressed  to  the  same  authorities 
informing   them   of   such   return   to 
duty.     (64) 
Q.  What  action  is  taken  by  an  officer  when 

he  reports  to  a  station  for  duty? 
A.  1.  He  puts  on  his  uniform  and  side-arms. 

2.  Proceeds  to  the  office  of  the  adjutant, 
introduces  himself  and  indicates  his  de- 
sire to  report  to  the  Commanding 
Officer. 

3.  When  informed  by  the  Adjutant  that 
the  commanding  officer  will  receive  him, 
he  places  himself  in  front  of  the  com- 
manding officer,  facing  him,  stands  at 
attention,  salutes  and  reports : 

Sir,  First  Lieutenant  John  Doe,  such- 
and-such  organization,  reports  for 
duty. 

4.  At  this  time  Lieutenant  Doe  presents 
a  copy  of  the  order  directing  him  to 
report  for  duty.  On  the  face  of  the 
order  he  will  have  previously  noted  the 
date  and  place  of  its  receipt.  (Received 
Oct.  16th,  1916— New  York  City.) 

5.  The  Commanding  Officer  will  return  the 
salute,  probably  shake  hands  with  him 
and  welcome  him  to  the  regiment. 

6.  The  remainder  of  the  ceremony  is 
rather  in  the  nature  of  a  social  call, 
during  which  time  Lieutenant  Doe  will 
receive  instructions  regarding  quarters, 
messing,  etc.     (68) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  an  ofUcer  has 
apparently  taken  undue  time  in  report- 
ing for  duty  after  the  receipt  of  an 
order? 

A.  If  he  shall  appear  to  have  made  unneces- 
sary delay  en  route,  he  will  be  required 
to  explain  the  cause  thereof  in  writing. 


If  the  commanding  officer  deem  the  ex- 
planation unsatisfactory,  he  will  for- 
ward the  same,  with  a  statement  of  the 
facts  in  the  case,  to  the  department 
commander.     (68) 

Q.  How  are  delays  in  reporting  for  duty  and 
from  leave  regarded? 

A,  When  such  delays  are  duly  authorized, 
they  are  regarded  as  leaves  of  absence. 
(70) 

Q.  When  orders  directing  the  travel  of  ofH- 
cers  contemplate  the  payment  of  mile- 
age, what  points  must  they  specify? 

A.  L  They    must    state    the    specific    duty 
enjoined. 
2.  They     must    state    that    "the    travel 
directed  is  necessary  in  the  military  ser- 
vice."    (71) 

Q.  When  officers  are  summoned  before  a  civil 
court  as  witnesses,  what  action  is  taken 
with  respect  to  their  transportation? 

A.  I.  They  receive  necessary  expenses  in- 
curred in  travel  and  attendance  from 
the  civil  authorities.  Mileage  or  travel 
allowances  will  not  be  paid  by  the  War 
Department. 
2.  If  absolutely  necessary  transportation 
in  kind  may  be  furnished  by  the  Quar- 
termaster and  the  account  forwarded 
to  the  War  Departmeni  for  presentation 
to  the  Department  of  Justice  for  pay- 
ment.    (75) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  retirement  of  an 
officer  of  the  Army? 

A.  1.  When  an  officer  reaches  the  age  of  64 
years  he  is  retired  by  operation  of  law. 

2.  When  he  reaches  the  age  of  62  years 
he  may  be  retired  by  order  of  the 
President. 

3.  He  may  be  retired  on  his  own  request 
after  having  completed  more  than  30 
years'   service. 

4.  He  may  be  retired  at  any  time  on 
account  of  disability  or  incapacity  to 
perform  the  duties  of  his  grade.  (76 
to  78) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  resignation  of  an 
officer  of  the  Army? 

A.  1.  The  resignation  tendered  by  an  officer 
will  be  forwarded  by  his  commanding 
officer,  through  military  channels,  to  the 
War  Department  for  the  consideration 
of  the  President.  Until  the  resignation 
is  duly  accepted  the  officer  will  not  be 
considered  out  of  the  service. 
2.  A  resignation  tendered  under  charges 


Night   Operations 


will  be  forwarded,  accompanied  by  a 
report  in  the  case  andj,  if  practicable, 
by  a  copy  of  the  charges. 
3.  Leave  of  absence  will  not  be  granted  on 
tender  of  resignation  unless  the  resig- 
nation is  unconditional  and  immediate. 
(79  to  82) 

Q.  May  an  oiRcer  on  the  active  list  of  the 
Army  hold  a  civil  oificef 

A.  An  officer  of  the  Army  on  the  active  list 
who  accepts  or  exercises  the  functions 
of  a  civil  office  contrary  to  law,  thereby 
ceases  to  be  an  officer  of  the  Army.  An 
officer  on  the  active  list  cannot  lawfully 
accept  or  hold  aiiy  office  created  by 
State  or  municipal  authority,  whether  in 
State  military  organizations  or  other- 
wise.    (82) 

Q.  What  report  is  made  on  the  death  of  an 
officer  of  the  Army? 

A.  1.  The  place,  cause,  day  and  hour  will 
be  reported  without  delay  by  telegraph, 
by  the  immediate  commanding  officer, 
to  the  Adjutant-General  of  the  Army, 
to  the  brigade  commander,  to  the  Coast 
artillery  district  commander,  and  to  the 
Department  commander. 
2.  If  the  officer  is  on  the  active  list  of  the 
Army  the  report  will  show  whether  or 
not  his  death  was  from  wounds  or  dis- 
ease contracted  in  line  of  duty,  or  con- 
tracted as  the  result  of  his  own  mis- 
conduct.    (83) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  with  respect  to  the 
public  property  and  funds  for  which  a 
deceased  officer  was  accountable  or 
responsible? 

A.  1.  On  the  death  of  an  officer  in  charge  of 
public  property  or  funds,  his  command- 
ing officer  will  appoint  a  board  of  offi- 
cers, three  when  practicable,  which  will 
inventory  the  same  and  make  the  cus- 
tomary returns  therefor,  stating  accu- 
rately the  amounts  and  condition. 

2.  These  the  commanding  officer  will  for- 
ward to  the  chiefs  of  bureaus  to  which 
the  property  or  funds  pertain,  and  he 
will  designate  an  officer  to  take  charge 
of  such  property  or  funds  until  orders 
are  received  from  the  proper  authority. 

3.  Cash  on  hand  may  be  invoiced  by  the 
board  to  the  deceased  officer's  succes- 
sor, but  balances  to  his  credit  with  the 
treasurer,  an  assistant  treasurer,  or  a 
designated  depositary,  or  a  fiscal  agent 
of  the  United  States,  over  and  above  his 


outstanding  checks,  will  be  deposited  to 
the  credit  of  the  Treasurer  of  the  United 
States  by  the  chiefs  of  bureaus  when 
the  board  has  reported  to  the  bureaus 
the  balances  over  and  above  such 
checks.     (86) 

Q.  What  is  the  personnel  of  the  Post  Non- 
commissioned Staff  of  the  Army? 

A.  1.  Ordnance  Sergeants. 

2.  Quartermaster  Sergeants,  Quartermas- 
ter Corps.     (98) 

Q.  By  whom  are  members  of  the  Post  Non- 
commissioned Staff  appointed? 

A.  They  are  appointed  by  the  Secretary  of 
War.     (98) 

Q.  What  qualifications  must  an  enlisted  man 
possess  for  appointment  to  the  Post 
Noncommissioned  Staff? 

A.  1.  Ordnance  Sergeants.  From  sergeants 
of  the  line  who  have  served  at  least 
eight  years  in  the  Army,  including  four 
years  as  noncommissioned  officers,  and 
who  are  less  than  45  years  of  age. 

2.  Quartermaster  Sergeants,  Quartermas- 
ter Corps.  From  competent  noncom- 
missioned officers  of  the  Army  who 
have  served  therein  at  least  five  years, 
three  years  of  such  service  having  been 
rendered  as  noncommissioned  officers, 
and  whose  character  and  education  shall 
fit  them  to  take  charge  of  public  prop- 
erty, and  to  act  as  clerks  and  assistants 
to  the  proper  officers  of  the  Army  in 
charge  of  public  property. 

3.  Each  class  of  these  noncommissioned 
officers  is  required  to  pass  a  physical 
and  mental  examination  prior  to 
appointment.     (98) 

Q.  When  an  enlisted  man  is  detached  from 
his  company,  what  document  accom- 
panies him? 
A.  A  Descriptive  List  will  be  prepared  and 
forwarded  to  his  new  commanding 
officer.  (104) 
Q.  Is  the  Descriptive  List  ordinarily  intrusted 

to  the  soldier? 
A.  No.    When  it  can  be  avoided  the  Descrip- 
tive List  will  not  be  intrusted  to  the 
soldier  but  to  an  officer  or  noncommis- 
sioned officer  under  whose  charge  he 
may  be,  or  it  may  be  forwarded  by  mail 
so  as  to  arrive  at  the  soldier's  destina- 
tion at  or  prior  to  the  time  he  is  sched- 
uled to  arrive.     (94) 
Note. — At  this  point  it  is  considered  ad- 
visable to  explain  the  normal  procedure  in 


Night   Operations 


transforming  a  man  from  his  status- of  citizen 
to  that  of  a  soldier  in  the  Army  of  the  United 
States  and  to  outHne  the  administrative  feat- 
ures of  such  transformation. 

Any  male  citizen  of  the  United  States  or 
any  person  who  has  legally  declared  his  inten- 
tion to  become  a  citizen,  if  above  the  age  of 
21  and  under  the  age  of  35  years,  ablebodied, 
free  from  disease,  of  good  character  and  tem- 
perate habits,  may  be  accepted  for  enlistment 
in  the  Army. 

The  citizen  applies  to  the  recruiting  officer 
at  any  one  of  the  numerous  recruiting  stations 
distributed  throughout  the  country,  for  en- 
listment. After  ascertaining  that  he  fulfills 
the  requirements  as  set  forth  in  the  preced- 
ing paragraph,  the  nature  of  the  service  and 
terms  of  enlistment  are  fully  explained, 
any  questions  that  he  may  bring  up  are 
answered,  and  before  the  enlistment  blanks 
are  filled  in,  the  recruiting  officer  will  read 
to  him  and  offer  for  his  signature  the 
"  Declaration  of  Applicant "  to  enlist  in  the 
Army  of  the  United  States,  as  follows : 
Declaration  of  Applicant. 

I,  desiring  to  enlist  in  the  Army 

of  the  United  States  for  the  term  of  seven 
year  SI,  do  declare  that  I  have  neither  wife 
nor  child ;  that  I  am  of  the  legal  age  to  enlist 
and  believe  myself  to  be  physically  qualified 
to  perform  the  duties  of  an  ablebodied  sol- 
dier; and  I  do  further  declare  that  I  am 
of  good  habits  and  character  in  all  respects 
and  have  never  been  discharged  from  the 
United  States  service  (Army  or  Navy)  or 
any  other  service  on  account  of  disability  or 
through  sentence  of  either  a  civil  or  military 
court,  nor  discharged  from  any  service,  civil 
or  military,  except  with  good  character,  and 
for  the  reasons  given  by  me  to  the  recruiting 
officer  prior  to  this  enlistment.  (Signed  and 
witnessed.) 

After  this  declaration  has  been  signed  the 
recruiting  officer  conducts  a  physical  exam- 
ination of  the  applicant  sufficient  in  scope  to 
detect  any  radical  defects  that  would  dis- 
qualify him  for  active  service. 

Having  passed  the  physical  examination  the 
applicant  is  forwarded  to  one  of  the  general 
Recruit  Depots,  of  which  one  is  located  at 
each  of  the  following  points :  Fort  Slocum, 
NY.;  Columbia  Barracks,  Ohio;  Jefferson 
Barracks,  Mo. ;  Fort  Logan,  Colo. ;  and 
Angel   Island,  Cal. 

While  in  the  service,  the  soldier's  record 


is  kept  on  a  form  known  as  the  "  Service 
Record."  This  record  is  begun  by  the  re- 
cruiting officer  who  fills  in  the  data  relative 
to  description  of  the  applicant,  prior  service 
if  any,  and  facts  relating  to  the  current 
enlistment. 

This  record  follows  the  soldier  all  through 
his  service,  being  forwarded  in  turn  to  the 
recruit  rendezvous,  to  the  regimental  com- 
mander, and,  finally,  to  the  company  com- 
mander. Each  officer  through  whose  hands  it 
passes,  adds  the  necessary  data  to  cover  the 
period  during  which  the  soldier  is  under  his 
command  and  forwards  the  Record  by  en- 
dorsement to  the  next  commander,  each 
keeping  a  copy  of  the  forwarding  Endorse- 
ment. 

Within  a  reasonable  time  after  arrival  at 
the  recruit  depot  the  applicant  is  given  a 
critical  physical  examination  by  a  Medical 
Officer  of  the  Army,  which,  if  he  passes 
satisfactorily,  is  followed  by  his  being  sworn 
into  the  service  of  the  United  States ;  the 
making  of  his  identification  record,  consist- 
ing of  a  front  view  and  profile  photograph 
and  a  minute  description  of  all  permanent  or 
indelible  marks  on  his  body.  If  necessary 
he  is  then  vaccinated  against  small-pox  and 
the  first  injection  of  the  typhoid  prophylaxis 
is  administered.  ^ 

His  Service  Record  is  completed  to  include 
Descriptive  List,  page  2,  Prior  Service  and 
the  first  part  of  Current  Enlistment,  page  3. 

The  recruit  is  retained  at  the  depot  for 
a  variable  length  of  time,  where  he  is  given 
such  elementary  instruction  as  is  practicable 
in  the  time  available,  and  is  then  forwarded 
to  a  regular  organization. 

When  the  soldier  is  sent  from  the  recruit 
depot  to  a  post  or  camp,  or  regiment  for 
assignment,  the  adjutant  or  some  other  des- 
ignated officer  will  fill  out  the  first  Endorse- 
ment and  turn  the  Record  over  to  the 
officer  or  noncommissioned  officer  in  charge 
of  the  recruits ;  or,  if  no  officer  or  noncom- 
missioned officer  be  in  command,  the  Record 
will  be  mailed  to  the  new  regimental  com- 
mander. 

Upon  assignment  of  the  soldier  to  a  com- 
pany, the  post,  camp  or  regimental  Com- 
mander transmits  the  service  Record  to  the 
commanding  officer  of  the  Company  to  which 
the  soldier  is  assigned.  At  the  same  time, 
he  detaches  the  second  leaf  of  the  record 
(which  is  perforated  for  this  purpose)  and 


6 


Night   Operations 


mails  it  to  the  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army 
for  file. 

The  Company  Commander  keeps  the  record 
up  to  date  and,  if  the  soldier  be  detached  or 
transferred,  forwards  it  by  endorsement  to 
the  new  Commanding  officer. 

The  recruit  has  now  joined  his  regular 
organization  and  will  thereafter  be  borne  on 
the  rolls  and  returns  thereof. 

When  a  soldier  is  furloughed  to  the  re- 
serve, his  service  record  is  forwarded  by  in- 
dorsement to  the  officer  in  charge  of 
reservists'  records.  If  detached  at  the  time, 
a  copy  is  sent  to  his  company  commander. 

When  a  soldier  is  discharged  or  otherwise 
separated  from  the  service,  without  being 
furloughed  to  the  reserve,  his  service  record 
is  closed  and  filed  with  the  records  of  his 
company. 

The  service  record  contains  a  complete 
record  of  the  soldier's  service  and  his  ac- 
counts with  the  government.  In  it  are  en- 
tered : 

1.  His  name,  rank  and  organization. 

2.  Name  and  address  of  the  person  to  be 
notified  in  case  of  emergency. 

3.  Place  of  birth  and  age  at  enlistment. 

4.  Description,  etc.,  including  records  of 
various    inoculations. 

5.  A  record  of  his  previous  military  service. 

6.  A  record  of  his  present  service. 

7.  Military  record  as  follows :  Date  of 
appointment  and  grade  to  which  appointed 
in  case  of  noncommissioned  officer;  marks- 
manship or  gunnery;  battles  participated  in; 
wounds  or  injuries;  record  of  Medal  of 
Honor  or  Certificate  of  Merit  that  has  been 
granted ;  furloughs ;  time  lost  to  be  made 
good  under  A.  W.  107;  confinement;  dis- 
ability   from   use    of   drugs,   etc. 

8.  A  complete  record  of  convictions  by 
court  martial. 

9.  Pay  detained  by  sentence  of  court- 
martial. 

10.  Complete  statement  of  the  soldier's 
clothing  account  with  the  Government,  show- 
ing date  of  each  issue  of  clothing,  the  money 
value  of  same;  statement  showing  the 
clothing  settlements  that  have  been  made 
between  the  soldier  and  government  during 
the  continuance  of  the  record. 

11.  A  record  of  allotments  made  by  the 
soldier  and  the  date  to  which  same  have 
been  paid. 


12.  Record  of  the  soldier's  deposits,  show- 
ing date  of  deposit,  amount  deposited  and 
name  of  paymaster  with  whom  deposit  was 
made. 

Q.  What  is  a  furlough? 
A.  A  furlough  is  a  permit  in  writing,  author- 
izing a  soldier  to  be  absent  from  duty 
for  a  definite  period  of  time  specified 
therein  and  authorizing  him  to  go  to 
a  definite  place.     (106) 
Q.  Who  may  grant  furloughs  to  soldiers? 
A.  Any  commanding  officer.     (106) 
Q.  For  what  periods  are  the  several  com- 
manding  oMcers   authorised    to    grant 
furloughs? 
A.  1.  Territorial    Department    commanders, 
Brigade,  district  and  post  commanders, 
and  chief  of  the  War  Department  bu- 
reaus, for  three  months. 

2.  General  Hospital,  general  supply  de- 
pot, mine  planter  and  regimental  com- 
manders for  one  month. 

3.  A  furlough  for  a  period  exceeding 
three  months  will  not  be  granted  except 
by  the  War  Department,  and  then  only 
under  the  most  unusual  and  urgent  cir- 
cumstances.    (106) 

Q.  What  general  rules  govern  the  granting 
of  furloughs  to  enlisted  men  and  the 
limitations  placed  on  them? 
A.  A  furlough  will  not  be  granted  to  an  en- 
listed man  about  to  be  discharged. 

Not  more  than  five  per  cent  of  a  com- 
mand may  be  on  furlough  at  the  same 
time. 

An  enlisted  man  on  furlough  will  not 
leave  the  United  States  to  go  beyond 
the  sea  unless  the  furlough  includes 
permission  to  do  so. 

The  limits  prescribed  will  be  stated  in  the 
furlough,  and  if  exceeded  may  be  re- 
voked and  the  soldier  arrested. 

Furloughs  granted  to  enlisted  men  serving 
beyond  the  continental  limits  of  the 
United  States,  for  the  purpose  of  re- 
turning thereto,  will  take  effect  on  the 
date  they  reach  the  United  States. 

Soldiers  on  furlough  will  not  take  with 
them  their  arms  or  accoutrements. 

No  payments  will  be  made  to  soldiers  on 
furlough,   without  authority   from  the 
War  Department.  (106  to  111) 
Q.  What  constitutes  the  offense  of  desertion 

on  the  part  of  a  soldier? 
A.  Absenting  himself  without  leave  with  the 


Night   Operations 


intention  of  not  returning  to  the  mili- 
tary  service.     (116) 

Q.  After  what  period  of  absence  is  an  enlisted 
man  reported  a  deserter? 

A.  No  man  will  be  reported  a  deserter  until 
after  the  expiration  of  ten  days  (should 
he  remain  away  that  length  of  time) 
unless  the  company  commander  has 
reason  to  believe  that  the  absentee  does 
not  intend  to  return.  Should  the  sol- 
dier not  return  or  not  be  apprehended 
within  the  time  specified,  his  desertion 
will  date  from  the  commencement  of 
his  unauthorized  absence.     (132) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  by  the  company 
commander  when  a  soldier  deserts? 

A.  1.  Ascertain  whether  or  not  any  govern- 
ment property  has  been  lost  in  conse- 
quence of  the  desertion. 

2.  Secure  the  clothing  and  effects  aban- 
doned by  the  deserter. 

3.  Prepare  a  number  of  deserters'  De- 
scriptive Lists  on  the  special  blank  pro- 
vided for  that  purpose  and  forward 
them  to  the  commanding  officer.    (116) 

Q.  What    action   is    taken   with   respect    to 
property  lost  in  consequence  of  a  deser- 
tion ? 
A.  It  will  be  surveyed  as  in  the  ordinary  case 
of  property  lost  or  destroyed  and  the 
money  value  of  same  will  be  charged 
against  the  deserter  on  the  next  pay 
rolls  of  the  company. 
Note. — At  this  point  it  is  deemed  appro- 
priate to  explain  the  action  taken  with  re- 
spect  to   Government  property   lost   or   de- 
stroyed.   When  property  is  lost  or  destroyed 
the  officer  accountable  or  responsible  there- 
for prepares  a  "  Report  of  Survey,"  in  trip- 
licate, upon  which  are  enumerated  the  articles 
of  property  so  lost  or  destroyed,  the  money 
value  of  same,  and  a  notation  citing  the  cir- 
cumstances attending  such  loss  or  destruc- 
tion.   The  affidavits  and  certificates  on  page  2 
are  accomplished  and  the  blanks  submitted 
to  the  commanding  officer  for  further  action. 
This  report  is  then  forwarded  to  the  Sur- 
vey Officer  who  makes  an  investigation  of  the 
circumstances  attending  the  loss  or  destruc- 
tion of  the  property  and  makes  a  finding  and 
recommendation  with  respect  to  it.     When 
this  finding  and  recommendation  are  approved 
by  the  commanding  officer,  the  papers  are 
complete  and  are  disposed  of  as  follows  : 

Two  copies  are  forwarded  to  the  officer 


who  is  accountable  for  the  property, 
for   use   by   him   as   vouchers   to   his 
return. 
One  copy  is   forwarded  to  Department 
Headquarters  for  administrative  exam- 
ination and  file. 
When  property  pertaining  to  more  than  one 
supply  department  is  lost  through  desertion, 
survey  reports  covering  each  class  of  prop- 
erty have  to  be  made  out  as  indicated.  (116) 
Q.  What  disposition  is  made  of  the  clothing 

abandoned  by  a  deserter? 
A.  The  company  or  detachment  commander 
turns  over  the  clothing  abandoned  by 
a  deserter  to  the  quartermaster,  with  a 
certificate  showing  its  condition  and  the 
name  of  the  deserter  to  whom  it  be- 
longed. 
The  body  of  this  certificate  would  read  as 
follows : 

"  I  hereby  certify  that  the  articles  of 
clothing  enumerated  below,  in  the  con- 
dition noted,  were  abandoned  by  Private 
John  Doe,  who  deserted  from  Company  C, 
4Sth  Infantry,  on  the  16th  day  of  October, 
1916."  (117) 


No. 


Article. 


Condition. 


Q.  What  disposition  is  made  of  the  personal 
effects  other  than  clothing,  abandoned 
by  a  deserter? 

A.  All  personal  effects  of  a  deserter  will  be 
disposed  of  as  in  the  case  of  the  un- 
claimed effects  of  a  deceased  soldier — 
i.e.,  they  will  be  sold  by  a  council  of 
administration  and  the  proceeds  of  the 
sale  deposited  with  a  quartermaster. 
(See  post.)    (117) 

Q.  What  disposition  is  made  of  the  Descrip- 
tive Lists  of  Deserters? 

A.  They  are  sent  to  such  marshals,  sheriffs, 
and  police  officers  as  the  commanding 
officer  may  deem  proper;  also,  to  the 
officer  in  charge  of  the  recruiting  sta- 
tion at  or  near  the  place  where  the 
deserter  was  accepted  for  enlistment. 
(118) 

Q.  What  reward  is  paid  for  the  apprehension 
and  delivery  of  a  deserter? 

A.  A  reward  Qf  $50  will  be  paid  to  any  civil 
officer  or  civilian  for  the  apprehension 
and  delivery  to  the  proper  military 
authorities  at  a  military  post  of  a 
deserter  from  the  military  service. 
(121)    ^ 


6 


Night  Operations 


mails  it  to  the  Adjutant  General  of  the  Army 
for  file. 

The  Company  Commander  keeps  the  record 
up  to  date  and,  if  the  soldier  be  detached  or 
transferred,  forwards  it  by  endorsement  to 
the  new  Commanding  officer. 

The  recruit  has  now  joined  his  regular 
organization  and  will  thereafter  be  borne  on 
the  rolls  and  returns  thereof. 

When  a  soldier  is  furloughed  to  the  re- 
serve, his  service  record  is  forwarded  by  in- 
dorsement to  the  officer  in  charge  of 
reservists'  records.  If  detached  at  the  time, 
a  copy  is  sent  to  his  company  commander. 

When  a  soldier  is  discharged  or  otherwise 
separated  from  the  service,  without  being 
furloughed  to  the  reserve,  his  service  record 
is  closed  and  filed  with  the  records  of  his 
company. 

The  service  record  contains  a  complete 
record  of  the  soldier's  service  and  his  ac- 
counts with  the  government.  In  it  are  en- 
tered : 

1.  His  name,  rank  and  organization. 

2.  Name  and  address  of  the  person  to  be 
notified  in  case  of  emergency. 

3.  Place  of  birth  and  age  at  enlistment. 

4.  Description,  etc.,  including  records  of 
various    inoculations. 

5.  A  record  of  his  previous  military  service. 

6.  A  record  of  his  present  service. 

7.  Military  record  as  follows :  Date  of 
appointment  and  grade  to  which  appointed 
in  case  of  noncommissioned  officer;  marks- 
manship or  gunnery ;  battles  participated  in ; 
wounds  or  injuries;  record  of  Medal  of 
Honor  or  Certificate  of  Merit  that  has  been 
granted ;  furloughs ;  time  lost  to  be  made 
good  under  A.  W.  107;  confinement;  dis- 
ability  from   use   of   drugs,   etc. 

8.  A  complete  record  of  convictions  by 
court  martial. 

9.  Pay  detained  by  sentence  of  court- 
martial. 

10.  Complete  statement  of  the  soldier's 
clothing  account  with  the  Government,  show- 
ing date  of  each  issue  of  clothing,  the  money 
value  of  same;  statement  showing  the 
clothing  settlements  that  have  been  made 
between  the  soldier  and  government  during 
the  continuance  of  the  record. 

11.  A  record  of  allotments  made  by  the 
soldier  and  the  date  to  which  same  have 
been  paid. 


12.  Record  of  the  soldier's  deposits,  show- 
ing date  of  deposit,  amount  deposited  and 
name  of  paymaster  with  whom  deposit  was 
made. 

Q.  What  is  a  furlough? 
A.  A  furlough  is  a  permit  in  writing,  author- 
izing a  soldier  to  be  absent  from  duty 
for  a  definite  period  of  time  specified 
therein  and  authorizing  him  to  go  to 
a  definite  place.     (106) 
Q.  Who  may  grant  furloughs  to  soldiers? 
A.  Any  commanding  officer.     (106) 
Q.  For  what  periods  are   the  several  com- 
manding  oificers   authorized    to   grant 
furloughs? 
A.  1.  Territorial    Department    commanders, 
Brigade,  district  and  post  commanders, 
and  chief  of  the  War  Department  bu- 
reaus, for  three  months. 

2.  General  Hospital,  general  supply  de- 
pot, mine  planter  and  regimental  com- 
manders for  one  month. 

3.  A  furlough  for  a  period  exceeding 
three  months  will  not  be  granted  except 
by  the  War  Department,  and  then  only 
under  the  most  unusual  and  urgent  cir- 
cumstances.    (106) 

Q.  What  general  rules  govern  the  granting 
of  furloughs  to  enlisted  men  and  the 
limitations  placed  on  them? 
A.  A  furlough  will  not  be  granted  to  an  en- 
listed man  about  to  be  discharged. 

Not  more  than  five  per  cent  of  a  com- 
mand may  be  on  furlough  at  the  same 
time. 

An  enlisted  man  on  furlough  will  not 
leave  the  United  States  to  go  beyond 
the  sea  unless  the  furlough  includes 
permission  to  do  so. 

The  limits  prescribed  will  be  stated  in  the 
furlough,  and  if  exceeded  may  be  re- 
voked and  the  soldier  arrested. 

Furloughs  granted  to  enlisted  men  serving 
beyond  the  continental  limits  of  the 
United  States,  for  the  purpose  of  re- 
turning thereto,  will  take  effect  on  the 
date  they  reach  the  United  States. 

Soldiers  on  furlough  will  not  take  with 
them  their  arms  or  accoutrements. 

No  payments  will  be  made  to  soldiers  on 
furlough,   without  authority   from  the 
War  Department.   (106  to  111) 
Q.  What  constitutes  the  offense  of  desertion 

on  the  part  of  a  soldier? 
A.  Absenting  himself  without  leave  with  the 


Night  Operations 


intention  of  not  returning  to  the  mili- 
tary  service.     (116) 

Q.  After  what  period  of  absence  is  an  enlisted 
man  reported  a  deserter? 

A.  No  man  will  be  reported  a  deserter  until 
after  the  expiration  of  ten  days  (should 
he  remain  away  that  length  of  time) 
unless  the  company  commander  has 
reason  to  believe  that  the  absentee  does 
not  intend  to  return.  Should  the  sol- 
dier not  return  or  not  be  apprehended 
within  the  time  specified,  his  desertion 
will  date  from  the  commencement  of 
his  unauthorized  absence.     (132) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  by  the  company 
commander  when  a  soldier  deserts? 

A.  1.  Ascertain  whether  or  not  any  govern- 
ment property  has  been  lost  in  conse- 
quence of  the  desertion. 

2.  Secure  the  clothing  and  effects  aban- 
doned by  the  deserter. 

3.  Prepare  a  number  of  deserters'  De- 
scriptive Lists  on  the  special  blank  pro- 
vided for  that  purpose  and  forward 
them  to  the  commanding  officer,    (116) 

Q.  What    action   is    taken   with   respect    to 
property  lost  in  consequence  of  a  deser- 
tion? 
A.  It  will  be  surveyed  as  in  the  ordinary  case 
of  property  lost  or  destroyed  and  the 
money  value  of  same  will  be  charged 
against  the  deserter  on  the  next   pay 
rolls  of  the  company. 
Note. — At  this  point  it  is  deemed  appro- 
priate to  explain  the  action  taken  with  re- 
spect  to    Government  property   lost   or   de- 
stroyed.   When  property  is  lost  or  destroyed 
the  officer  accountable  or  responsible  there- 
for prepares  a  "  Report  of  Survey,"  in  trip- 
licate, upon  which  are  enumerated  the  articles 
of  property  so  lost  or  destroyed,  the  money 
value  of  same,  and  a  notation  citing  the  cir- 
cumstances attending  such  loss  or  destruc- 
tion.   The  affidavits  and  certificates  on  page  2 
are  accomplished  and  the  blanks  submitted 
to  the  commanding  officer  for  further  action. 
This  report  is  then  forwarded  to  the  Sur- 
vey Officer  who  makes  an  investigation  of  the 
circumstances  attending  the  loss  or  destruc- 
tion of  the  property  and  makes  a  finding  and 
recommendation  with  respect  to  it.     When 
this  finding  and  recommendation  are  approved 
by   the  commanding  officer,  the  papers  are 
complete  and  are  disposed  of  as  follows  : 

Two  copies  are  forwarded  to  the  officer 


who  is  accountable  for  the  property, 
for   use   by   him   as   vouchers   to   his 
return. 
One  copy  is   forwarded  to  Department 
Headquarters  for  administrative  exam- 
ination and  file. 
When  property  pertaining  to  more  than  one 
supply  department  is  lost  through  desertion, 
survey  reports  covering  each  class  of  prop- 
erty have  to  be  made  out  as  indicated.  (116) 
Q.  What  disposition  is  made  of  the  clothing 

abandoned  by  a  deserter? 
A.  The  company  or  detachment  commander 
turns  over  the  clothing  abandoned  by 
a  deserter  to  the  quartermaster,  with  a 
certificate  showing  its  condition  and  the 
name  of  the  deserter  to  whom  it  be- 
longed. 
The  body  of  this  certificate  would  read  as 
follows : 

"  I  hereby  certify  that  the  articles  of 
clothing  enumerated  below,  in  the  con- 
dition noted,  were  abandoned  by  Private 
John  Doe,  who  deserted  from  Company  C, 
4Sth  Infantry,  on  the  16th  day  of  October, 
1916."  (117) 


No. 


Article. 


Condition. 


Q.  What  disposition  is  made  of  the  personal 
effects  other  than  clothing,  abandoned 
by  a  deserter? 

A.  All  personal  effects  of  a  deserter  will  be 
disposed  of  as  in  the  case  of  the  un- 
claimed effects  of  a  deceased  soldier — 
i.e.,  they  will  be  sold  by  a  council  of 
administration  and  the  proceeds  of  the 
sale  deposited  with  a  quartermaster. 
(See  post.)   (117) 

Q.  What  disposition  is  made  of  the  Descrip- 
tive Lists  of  Deserters? 

A.  They  are  sent  to  such  marshals,  sheriffs, 
and  police  officers  as  the  commanding 
officer  may  deem  proper;  also,  to  the 
officer  in  charge  of  the  recruiting  sta- 
tion at  or  near  the  place  where  the 
deserter  was  accepted  for  enlistment. 
(118) 

Q.  What  reward  is  paid  for  the  apprehension 
and  delivery  of  a  deserter? 

A.  A  reward  Qf  $50  will  be  paid  to  any  civil 
officer  or  civilian  for  the  apprehension 
and  delivery  to  the  proper  military 
authorities  at  a  military  post  of  a 
deserter  from  the  military  service. 
(121)    ^ 


10 


Night   Operations 


transferred  to  the  Army  reserve  the 
notation  is  made :  "  Furloughed  and 
transferred  to  the  Army  Reserve." 

3.  When  the  discharge  is  made  on  Certifi- 
cate of  Disability  the  ascertained  disa- 
bility, as  recited  in  the  certificate,  must 
be  given  in  the  final  statement  as  the 
reason  or  cause  for  discharge. 

4.  Whenever  a  soldier  is  discharged  prior 
to  the  expiration  of  his  term  of  ser- 
vice, the  actual  cause  of  discharge  will 
be  stated  in  the  order  directing  the 
discharge  and  the  same  will  be  fully 
stated  on  the  discharge  certificate  and 
final  statement.  Where  the  discharge 
is  ordered  on  account  of  the  soldier's 
misconduct,  or  unfitness  for  the  ser- 
vice, physical  or  in  character,  due  to 
the  soldier's  misconduct,  a  statement  to 
that  effect  will  be  set  forth  in  the 
order  and  will  be  noted  on  the  dis- 
charge certificate  and  final  statement. 
(140) 

Q.  Under  what  circumstances  may  a  soldier 
be  held  in  the  service  to  make  up  time 
lost? 

A.  1.  He  may  be  held  to  make  up  time  lost 
on  account  of  absence  without  leave. 
2.  He  may  be  held  to  make  up  time  lost 
by  absence  from  duty  on  account  of  his 
own  misconduct;  sickness  contracted, 
"  not  in  line  of  duty"  ;  absence  from 
duty  while  in  confinement,  awaiting 
trial,  awaiting  the  result  of  trial  and 
while  serving  sentence  after  trial  and 
conviction  for  an  offense.     (142) 

Q.  On  what  day  is  the  soldier  furloughed 
and  transferred  to  the  Army  Reserve? 

A,  On  the  last  day  of  his  period  of  active  ser- 
vice— i.e.,  if  enlisted  on  the  second  day 
of  the  month  his  term  will  expire  on 
the  first  day  of  the  same  month  in  the 
last  year  of  his  term  with  the  colors. 
(Note:  Under  existing  laws  a  soldier 
may  be  furloughed  and  transferred  to 
the  Reserve  at  any  time  after  having 
completed  a  year's  service.)     (143) 

Q.  When  a  soldier  is  unfitted  for  military 
service  what  action  is  taken? 

A.  1.  If  he  is  found  to  be  unfitted  on  account 
of  physical  disability  he  may  be  dis- 
charged on  Certificate  of  Disability, 
after  thorough  examination  by  a  medi- 
cal officer. 
2.  If  he  is  found  to  be  inapt,  or  does  not 


possess  the  required  degree  of  adapta- 
biHty  for  the  military  service,  or  gives 
evidence  of  habits  or  traits  of  character 
which  serve  to  render  his  retention  in 
the  service  undesirable  or  is  disquali- 
fied for  service,  physically  or  in  char- 
acter, through  his  own  misconduct,  his 
company  commander  will  report  the 
facts  to  the  commanding  officer.  The 
commanding  officer  convenes  a  board  of 
officers,  three  when  practicable,  to  de- 
termine whether  the  soldier  should  be 
discharged  prior  to  the  expiration  of 
his  term  of  enlistment. 

3.  The  sessions  of  this  board  are  con- 
ducted in  general  after  the  manner  of 
a  special  court  martial.  The  soldier 
is  authorized  to  challenge  members  of 
the  board  for  cause,  to  be  present 
throughout  the  conduct  of  the  investi- 
gation, to  have  witnesses  testify  in  his 
behalf  and  to  make  a  statement  in  his 
own  behalf. 

4.  When  the  findings  of  the  board  indi- 
cate disqualification  through  physical 
disability,  the  proceedings  are  accom- 
panied by  a  certificate  of  disability. 
(See  Post.) 

5.  If  discharge  is  recommended  by  the 
board,  the  proceedings,  if  approved  by 
the  convening  authority,  will  be  for- 
warded for  final  action  to  the  officer 
exercising  general  court  martial  juris- 
diction over  the  command.  The  pro- 
ceedings are  then  forwarded  to  the 
Adjutant-General  of  the  Army  for  file. 
(159) 

Q.  What  are  the  several  classes  of  discharge 

blanks? 
A.  1.  The  blank  for  honorable  discharge. 

2.  The  blank  for  discharge. 

3.  The  blank  for  dishonorable  discharge 
(yellow).     (150) 

Q.  Under  what  circumstances  are  the  several 
classes  of  discharge  blanks  used? 

A.  1.  The  blank  for  honorable  discharge, 
when  the  soldier's  conduct  has  been 
such  as  to  warrant  his  re-enlistment 
and  his  service  has  been  honest  and 
faithful. 
2.  The  blank  for  dishonorable  discharge, 
when  the  soldier  has  been  dishonorably 
discharged  by  sentence  of  a  court  mar- 
tial or  military  commission. 


Night   Operations 


11 


3.  The  blank  for  discharge  when  the  sol- 
dier is  discharged  except  as  specified 
under  sections  1  and  2  above.  (ISO) 

Q.  When  a  soldier  is  discharged  and  is  con- 
sidered suitable  material  for  a  volun- 
teer officer,  what  action  is  taken f 

A.  When  in  the  opinion  of  the  company  com- 
mander, the  circumstances  warrant  it, 
notation  will  be  made,  under  remarks 
on  the  back  of  the  discharge  certificate, 
that  the  soldier  is  fitted  for  a  commis- 
sion in  the  United  States  Volunteers, 
and  will  give  his  special  qualifications. 
(149) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  a  discharge 
certificate  is  lost  or  destroyed f 

A.  1.  A  discharge  certificate  will  not  be 
made  in  duplicate  and  under  no  cir- 
cumstances will  it  be  duplicated. 

2.  Upon  satisfactory  proof  of  loss  or  de- 
struction without  the  fault  of  the  per- 
son entitled  to  it,  the  War  Department 
may  issue  to  such  a  person  a  "  Certifi- 
cate of  Service,"  showing  the  date  of 
enlistment  in  and  discharge  from  the 
Army  and  the  character  given  on  the 
discharge  certificate. 

3.  An  application  for  certificate  in  lieu  of 
a  lost  or  destroyed  discharge  certifi- 
cate will  be  forwarded  directly  to  the 
Adjutant-General  of  the  Army  by  the 
soldier's  immediate  commander.  (151) 

Q.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  term 
"partial  Descriptive  List"? 

A.  Upon  the  discharge  of  a  soldier,  who  is 
absent  from  his  regular  organization, 
and  in  whose  case  a  Descriptive  List 
was  furnished,  a  "partial  Descriptive 
List,"  giving  date,  place  and  cause  of 
discharge,  the  character  given  on  dis- 
charge certificate,  whether  service  was 
honest  and  faithful,  and  containing  only 
such  other  data  as  pertain  to  the  mili- 
tary status  of  the  soldier  and  his 
accounts  while  absent,  will  be  fur- 
nished the  soldier's  organization  com- 
mander by  the  officer  who  made  the 
discharge.  (154) 

Q.  What  is  a  "Notification  of  Discharge"? 

A.  It  is  a  document  furnished  by  the  officer 
making  the  discharge  in  the  case  of  an 
enlisted  man  discharged  at  a  place 
where  there  is  no  available  office  pro- 
vided with  funds  to  make  payment  of 
Final  Statements.  (155) 


Q.  What  is  the  object  of  the  "  Notification  of 
Discharge  "? 

A.  It  is  merely  an  advance  statement  of  the 
soldier's  accounts  as  they  will  appear 
on  his  Final  Statements,  given  to  the 
officer  who  cashes  the  Final  Statements, 
as  a  check  against  same  and  to  prevent 
fraud  or  making  a  payment  of  Final 
Statements  that  may  have  been  altered 
after  they  are  given  to  the  soldier. 
(The  Notification  of  Discharge  is  made 
out  in  the  handwriting  of  the  officer 
who  is  to  sign  the  Final  Statement.  It 
is  mailed  to  the  quartermaster  who  is 
to  pay  the  Final  Statement  at  least  one 
week  prior  to  the  date  when  it  is  ex- 
pected that  the  Final  Statements  will 
be  presented  for  payment.  It  contains 
the  date  of  last  payment  to  the  soldier ; 
his  credits  and  debits,  in  words  and 
figures ;  and  all  other  data  essential 
for  proper  payment.  It  has  inscribed 
thereon  the  soldier's  signature  or  in 
case  he  cannot  write  a  statement  to  that 
effect.  When  the  Final  Statements  are 
to  be  paid  at  the  same  place  where  they 
are  executed  the  Notification  is  not 
required.)    (155) 

Q.  Who  is  held  responsible  for  overpayments 
caused  by  erroneous  entries  on  Final 
Statements? 

A.  The  officer  who  signs  the  Final  State- 
ment is  held  responsible  for  overpay- 
ments due  to  erroneous  entries,  and 
will  be  called  upon  to  reimburse  the 
Government  for  such  overpayments. 
(155) 

Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  a  dishonorable  dis- 
charge ? 

A.  A  dishonorable  discharge  from  the  service 
is  a  complete  expulsion  from  the  Army 
and  covers  all  unexpired  enlistments. 
(156) 

Q.  When  a  soldier  is  found  to  be  permanently 
unfitted  for  military  service  because  of 
wounds  or  disease,  what  action  is 
taken? 

A.  He  should,  if  practicable,  be  discharged 
on  "  Certificate  of  Disability "  before 
the  expiration  of  the  term  of  service  in 
which  the  disability  was  incurred. 
(Certificates  of  Disability  are  not  made 
in  duplicate  and  great  care  has  to  be 
taken  to  prevent  their  loss  or  destruc- 
tion.)   (159) 


12 


Night    Operations 


Q.  What  duties  devolve  upon  the  Company 
Commander  on  the  death  of  a  soldier 
of  his  organization? 

A.  1.  In  the  case  of  the  death  of  any  soldier, 
the  commanding  officer  of  his  troop, 
battery  or  company  shall  immediately 
secure  all  his  effects  then  in  camp  or 
quarters,  and  shall,  in  the  presence  of 
two  other  officers,  make  an  inventory 
thereof,  which  he  shall  transmit  to  the 
office  of  the  Department  of  War.  (Old 
126  Article  of  War.)  (This  inventory 
of  effects  is  made  in  triplicate  and  all 
three  copies  have  to  be  originals.  Two 
are  forwarded  and  the  third  retained 
with  the  company  records.) 

2.  Notify  the  nearest  relative  of  the  fact 
of  death.  (Note:  The  name  and  ad- 
dress of  the  person  to  be  notified  in 
case  of  emergency  (death)  will  be 
found  on  the  soldier's  Descriptive  List. 
This  notification  will  be  made  by  tele- 
graph and  at  the  same  time  a  request 
made  that  reply  be  forwarded  by  tele- 
graph as  to  whether  or  not  it  is  desired 
to  have  the  remains  shipped  home  at 
Government  expense  and  if  shipment 
home  is  desired  the  destination  and  the 
name  of  the  person  to  whom  the  re- 
mains are  to  be  consigned.) 

3.  Have  the  remains  prepared  for  ship- 
ment or  burial.  (When  the  death 
occurs  in  a  military  hospital,  the  sur- 
geon in  charge  is  responsible  that  the 
remains  are  prepared  for  shipment  or 
burial  as  the  case  may  be  and  his  re- 
sponsibility therefor  does  not  cease 
until  the  remains  are  turned  over  to 
the  quartermaster  for  shipment  or 
interment.) 

4.  Make  all  the  arrangements  for  the 
funeral.  Have  an  order  from  regi- 
mental headquarters  issued;  make 
arrangements  for  the  escort,  transpor- 
tation and  the  ceremony. 

5.  The  following  report  and  papers  are 
sent  to  the  Adjutant-General  of  the 
Army: 

(fl)  A  report  of  the  death  of  the 
soldier. 

(fc)  A  report  from  the  medical  offi- 
cer, if  there  be  one  having  a 
knowledge  of  the  facts,  if  not, 
from  the  soldier's  immediate 
commanding  officer,  as  to  the 


cause  of  death ;  whether  or  not 
it  was  from  wounds  or  disease 
contracted  in  line  of  duty; 
whether  or  not  it  was  from 
wounds  or  disease,  the  result 
of  his  own  misconduct. 

(c)  Duplicates  of   the   inventory  of 

effects. 

(d)  A      Final      Statement      (single 

copy).  (162  to  167) 
Q.  What  becomes  of  the  effects  of  a  de- 
ceased soldier? 
A.  1.  Officers  charged  with  the  care  and  cus- 
tody of  the  effects  of  deceased  soldiers 
are  required  to  turn  them  over  to  the 
legal  representatives  of  the  deceased. 
(Note:  In  case  the  effects  are  turned 
over  to  the  legal  representatives  as 
indicated  the  officer  will  take  a  receipt 
for  same  in  duplicate  and  forward  it 
to  the  Adjutant-General  of  the  Army. 
These  receipts  should  correspond  ex- 
actly with  the  inventory  of  effects  that 
has  been  previously  forwarded.  In 
case  there  is  any  discrepancy  in  the 
items  thereon  a  detailed  and  exhaustive 
explanation  will  be  required.) 
2.  Should  the  effects  not  be  claimed 
within  a  reasonable  time  they  will  be 
sold  by  a  council  of  administration 
under  the  authority  of  the  post  com- 
mander, and  the  proceeds  transferred 
to  the  soldier's  immediate  commander, 
by  whom  they  will  be  deposited  with 
a  Quartermaster  to  the  credit  of  the 
United  States.  Duplicate  receipts  will 
be  taken,  one  of  which  will  be  for- 
warded direct  to  the  Adjutant-General 
of  the  Army.  (Note:  When  the  pro- 
ceedings of  the  council  of  administra- 
tion are  prepared  they  should  show  in 
the  body  of  same  a  list  of  all  articles 
entered  on  the  inventory  of  effects, 
■  previously  prepared,  and  account  for 
the  disposition  of  each  and  every 
article.  Any  discrepancy  in  these  lists 
which  leaves  an  article  unaccounted 
for  will  result  in  endless  correspond- 
ence with  the  Adjutant-General's  Office. 
The  duplicate  of  the  receipt  will  be 
filed  with  the  appropriate  records  in 
the  company.  A  copy  of  the  pro- 
ceedings of  the  council  of  adminis- 
tration containing  a  duly  certified  list 
of  the  proceeds  will  be  forwarded  with 


Night   Operations 


13 


the    quartermaster's     receipt,   for    the 
money  deposited.) 

3.  There  is  no  authority  for  officers  to 
pay  the  debts  of  deceased  soldiers. 
(The  accounts  are  settled  by  the  Audi- 
tor for  the  War  Department.) 

4.  Watches,  trinkets,  personal  papers, 
and  keepsakes  will  not  be  sold,  but 
will  be  labeled  with  the  name,  rank 
and  organization  of  the  owner  and 
sent  directly  to  the  Adjutant-General 
of  the  Array  to  be  forwarded  to  the 
Auditor  for  the  War  Department  for 
the  benefit  of  those  legally  entitled  to 
them.  (163) 

Q.  What  report  is  made  of  the  disposition 
of  the  remains  of  a  deceased  soldier? 

A.  The  officer  under  whose  direction  the 
disposition  of  the  remains  is  made  will 
make  a  full  report  thereof  to  the 
Adjutant-General  of  the  Army.  (167) 

Q.  Distinguish  between  the  terms  "  Extra 
Duty  "  and  "  Special  Duty." 

A.  Enlisted  men  detailed  to  perform  specific 
services  which  remove  them  temporar- 
ily from  the  ordinary  duty  roster  of 
the  company  to  which  they  belong  will 
be  reported  on  "  Extra  Duty  "  if  receiv- 
ing increased  compensation  therefor, 
otherwise  on  "  Special  Duty."   (168) 

Q.  What  are  the  limitations  placed  on  en- 
listed men  being  detailed  on  extra  duty? 

A.  1.  They  will  not  be  placed  on  extra  duty 
without  the  sanction  of  the  department 
commander,  except  at  posts  commanded 
by  General  Officers. 

2.  They  will  not  be  employed  on  extra 
duty  in  time  of  war,  nor  in  time  of 
peace  for  labor  in  camp  or  garrison 
which  can  properly  be  performed  by 
fatigue  parties. 

3.  Duty  of  a  military  character  must  be 
performed  without  extra  compensation. 

4.  Except  in  case  of  emergency,  a  non- 
commissioned officer  will  not  be  de- 
tailed on  extra  duty  without  authority 
from  the  department  commander  or  the 
General  Officer  commanding  a  post  or 
in  other  cases  by  the  Secretary  of  War. 
A  noncommissioned  officer  will  not  be 
detailed  on  any  duty  inconsistent  with 
his  rank  and  position  in  the  military 
service. 

5.  Enlisted  men  in  the  several  staff  de- 
partments, including  members  of  the 
Post   noncommissioned   staff,   will   not 


be  detailed  on  extra  duty  except  by 
the  authority  of  the  War  Department. 
They  are  not  entitled  to  extra  duty 
pay  for  services  rendered  in  their  re- 
spective departments. 

6.  Company  mechanics,  artificers,  farriers, 
horseshoers,  saddlers  and  wagoners 
will  not  be  detailed  on  extra  duty. 

7.  Extra  duty  men  will  be  required  to 
attend  as  many  drill  inspections  and 
other  duties  as  commanding  officers 
deem  practicable,  unless  specifically 
excused  by  higher  authority. 

8.  Extra  duty  men  will  be  held  to  such 
hours  of  labor  as  may  be  expedient 
and  necessary;  but,  except  in  case  of 
urgent  necessity,  as  in  military  opera- 
tions, eight  hours  will  be  considered 
a  day's  work.  For  all  hours  em- 
ployed beyond  that  number,  the  soldier 
will  receive  additional  compensation — 
the  extra  hours  being  computed  as  frac- 
tions of  a  day  of  eight  hours'  dura- 
tion.    (168  to  176) 

Q.  What  is  the  rate  of  Extra  Duty  pay? 

A.  For  services  as  Mess  stewards  and  cooks 
at  recruit  depots — Steward:  at  the  rate 
of  50  cents  a  day  and  a  share  in  the 
remaining  money  allotted  for  the  pur- 
pose from  the  mess  fund.  Cooks :  25 
cents  per  day  or  a  sliare  in  the  $3 
allotted  from  the  mess  fund  for  the 
payment  of  cooks. 
As  helpers  to  ordnance  machinists  in  the 
alteration  and  maintenance  of  seacoast 
armament,  50  cents  a  day. 
As  clerks  in  coast  fortification  offices, 
switchboard  operators,  guards  at  mili- 
tary prisons  and  all  other  extra  duty 
services,  35  cents  a  day.  (170) 

Q.  What  organisation  in  the  mobile  army  is 
the   administrative   unit? 

A.  The  regiment. 

Q.  How  is  a  regiment  organised? 

A.  1.  A  headquarters     company,     troop     or 
battery. 

2.  A    supply   company   or   troop. 

3.  A  machine-gun  company  or  troop. 

4.  In  the  infantry  and  cavalry,  three  bat- 
talions or  squadrons  of  four  compa- 
nies or  troops  each;  in  the  artillery, 
two  battalions  of  three  batteries. 

Note. — The  headquarters  company  is 
commanded  by  the  Regimental  adju- 
tant. The  supply  company  by  the  regi- 
mental   quartermaster;    the    machine- 


14 


Night   Operations 


gun  company  by  a  captain ;  a  battalion 
is  normally  commanded  by  a  major  in 
whose  absence  the  senior  captain  com- 
mands ;  a  company  is  normally  com- 
manded by  a  captain,  in  whose  absence 
the  senior  officer  on  duty  therewith 
commands.   (Ed.) 

Q.  For  what  is  the  battalion  commander 
responsible? 

A.  A  battalion  commander  is  responsible  for 
the  instruction,  tactical  efficiency,  and 
preparedness  for  war  service  of  the 
troops  of  his  battalion  under  his  im- 
mediate command. 
Note. — When  the  designation  battalion  or 
company  is  referred  to  herein  it  is  also 
applicable  to  squadrons  of  cavalry, 
troops  of  cavalry  and  batteries  of 
field  artillery,  respectively.   (245) 

Q.  By  whom  are  Held  officers  assigned  to 
stations? 

A.  Field  officers  of  the  mobile  army  are 
assigned  to  stations  by  the  department 
commander.  (247) 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  adjutant  of 
a  regiment? 

A.  1,  He  commands  the  Headquarters  Com- 
pany. 

2.  Under  the  direction  of  the  commanding 
officer  he  will  have  charge  of  the 
various  rosters  of  service ;  he  will 
make,  publish  and  verify  all  details, 
keep  the  records  of  the  regiment  and 
perform  such  military  duties  with 
troops  as  are  required  by  regulations. 
Through  him  the  commanding  officer 
communicates  with  the  officers  and 
men  of  his  command. 

3.  The  adjutant  should  be  courteous  to 
and  on  friendly  terms  with  the  officers 
of  the  command  he  represents,  and  will 
avoid  all  discussions  of  the  orders  or 
military  conduct  of  his  superiors. 

4.  He  should  inform  himself  on  all  points 
of  military  usage  and  etiquette,  and  on 
proper  occasions  aid  with  his  advice 
and  experience  the  subalterns  of  the 
regiment,  especially  those  just  entering 
the  service. 

5.  He  will  endeavor  at  all  times  to  exert 
the  influence  belonging  to  his  station 
in  sustaining  the  reputation,  discipline 
and  harmony  of  the  command.  (251) 

Q.  What  books  of  record,  reports  and  papers 
will  be  kept  in  each  regiment? 


A.  1,  A  correspondence  book  with  the  docu- 
ment file  pertaining  thereto. 

2.  A  regimental  fund  book.  (The  regi- 
mental fund  consists  of  all  monies 
accruing  to  the  regiment  by  contri- 
bution, percentage  from  band  engage- 
ments, and  percentage  from  Post  Ex- 
change dividends.  This  money  is 
expended  for  the  benefit  of  the  regi- 
ment by  the  adjutant,  under  the  direc- 
tion of  the  regimental  commander.) 

3.  A  file  of  regimental  orders,  all  orders, 
instructions  and  circulars  from  higher 
authority;  copies  of  monthly  returns, 
and  other  returns  and  rolls  pertaining 
to  the  regiment.     (258) 

Q.  What  is  the  rule  governing  the  detail  of 
captains  on  detached  service? 

A.  The  detail  of  captains  on  detached  service 
away  from  their  arm  of  the  service 
will  be  limited,  as  far  as  practicable, 
to  those  required  by  law.  (265) 

Q.  For  what  is  the  company  commander 
responsible? 

A.  For  the  instruction,  tactical  efficiency  and 
preparedness  for  war  service  of  his 
company ;  for  the  care  and  preservation 
of  its  equipment  and  for  the  proper 
performance  of  duties  connected  with 
its  subsistence,  pay,  clothing,  accounts, 
reports  and  returns.     (266) 

Q.  What  is  the  order  of  succession  to  com- 
mand in  a  company? 

A.  In  the  absence  of  its  captain,  the  com- 
mand of  a  company  devolves  upon  the 
subaltern  next  in  rank  who  is  serving 
with  it,  unless  otherwise  specially 
directed.  (267) 

Q.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  the  selection 
and  the  standing  of  noncommissioned 
oMcers  in  a  company? 

A.  1.  Noncommissioned  officers  will  be  care- 
fully selected  and  instructed. 

2.  They  will  always  be  supported  by  com- 
pany commanders  in  the  proper  per- 
formance of  their  duties. 

3.  They  will  not  be  detailed  for  any  duty 
or  permitted  to  engage  in  any  occupa- 
tion inconsistent  with  their  rank  and 
position.  (Note  in  this  connection  non- 
commissioned officers  may  not  be  per- 
mitted to  engage  in  occupations  such 
as  company  barbers,  tailors,  etc.) 

4.  Officers  will  be  cautious  in  reproving 
them  in  the  presence  or  hearing  of 
private  soldiers.  (270) 


Night   Operations 


15 


Q.  By  whom  are  noncommissioned  oMcers 
appointed? 

A,  1.  By  regimental  commanders  on  the 
recommendation  of  company  and  bat- 
talion commanders. 

2.  When  a  battalion  is  stationed  away 
from  regimental  headquarters  the  bat- 
talion noncommissioned  staff  officers 
may  be  appointed  by  the  battalion 
commander. 

3.  In  the  coast  artillery  corps  companies 
noncommissioned  officers  are  appointed 
by  coast  defense  commanders  on  the 
recommendation  of  company  com- 
manders. 

4.  The  captain  selects  the  first  sergeant, 
quartermaster  sergeant,  mess  sergeants 
and  stable  sergeants  from  the  sergeants 
of  his  company.  (271) 

Q.  What  is  a  lance  corporal? 

A.  A  private  who  has  been  given  a  tem- 
porary appointment  to  the  grade  of 
noncommissioned  officer,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  testing  capacity  for  the  duties 
that  would  devolve  upon  him  as  a 
regularly  appointed  noncommissioned 
officer.  They  are  not  given  a  warrant 
but  are  obeyed  and  respected  as  cor- 
porals. (272) 

Q.  How  many  lance  corporals  may  there  be 
in  a  company  ? 

A.  No  company  may  have  more  than  one 
lance  corporal  at  a  time,  unless  there 
are  noncommissioned  officers  absent  by 
authority,  during  which  absences  there 
may  be  one  for  each  absentee.  (272) 

Q.  What  are  the  rules  with  respect  to  the 
warrants  of  noncommissioned  officers? 

A.  1.  Each  noncommissioned  officer  will  be 
furnished  with  a  certificate  or  warrant 
of  his  rank,  signed  by  the  regimental 
commander  and  countersigned  by  the 
adjutant. 

2.  A  separate  warrant  as  first  sergeant, 
quartermaster  sergeant  or  stable  ser- 
geant will  not  be  issued. 

3.  A  warrant  issued  to  a  noncommissioned 
officer  is.  his  personal  property. 

4.  Warrants  need  not  be  renewed  in  case 
of  re-enlistment  in  the  same  company, 
if  re-enlistment  is  made  the  day  fol- 


lowing that  of  discharge,  but  imless 
otherwise  ordered  by  the  regimental 
commander  or  coast  defense  comman- 
der, on  the  recommendation  of  the 
company  commander,  will  remain  in 
force  until  vacated  by  promotion  or 
reduction,  each  re-enlistment  and  con- 
tinuance to  be  noted  on  the  warrant 
by  the  company  commander. 
5.  The  warrants  for  noncommissioned 
officers  of  the  coast  artillery  corps  com- 
panies will  be  signed  by  the  coast  de- 
fense commander  and  countersigned  by 
the  coast  defense  adjutant.  (274) 

Q.  Under  what  circumstances  may  a  non- 
commissioned officer  be  reduced  to  the 
ranks? 

A.  1.  By  sentence  of  a  court  martial. 

2.  On  the  recommendation  of  the  company 
commander,  by  order  of  the  comman- 
der having  final  authority  to  appoint 
such  noncommissioned  officer. 

3.  On  the  recommendation  of  the  com- 
pany commander  by  a  battalion  com- 
mander or  senior  officer  on  duty  with 
the  detachment  of  a  regiment  serving 
in  another  department  or  at  such  dis- 
tance from  regimental  headquarters 
that  more  than  IS  days  are  required 
for  correspondence  to  pass  back  and 
forth.  .^ 

Note. — No  commissioned  officer  may  be 
reduced  because  of  absence  on  account 
of  sickness  or  injury  contracted  in  line 
of  duty.  The  transfer  of  a  noncom- 
missioned officer  from  one  company 
to  another  carries  with  it  reduction 
to  the  ranks  unless  otherwise  specified 
in  the  order  by  authority  competent 
to  issue  a  new  warrant.  When  a  non- 
commissioned officer,  while  in  arrest 
or  confinement,  is  reduced  by  sentence 
of  a  court  martial,  the  date  of  the 
order  publishing  the  sentence  is  the 
date  of  reduction.  In  all  other  cases 
the  reduction  takes  effect  on  the  date 
of  the  receipt  of  the  order  at  the  sol- 
dier's station.  The  desertion  of  a  non- 
commissioned officer  vacates  his  posi- 
tion from  the  date  of  his  unauthorized 
absence.  (276) 


Administration — Concluded  (February,  1917) 


Q.  What  restrictions  govern  the  detail  of  a 
soldier  for  duty  as  company  tailor? 

A.  1.  He  may  be  relieved  from  ordinary  mili- 
tary duty  while  so  detailed. 

2.  The  post  exchange  coimcil  will  fix  the 
rates  to  be  charged. 

3.  Accounts  due  the  tailor  may,  if  neces- 
sary, be  deducted  from  the  soldiers' 
pay  and  turned  over  to  him.     (279) 

4.  A  noncommissioned  officer  may  not  be 
detailed. 

Q.  What  books  of  record,  reports  and  papers 
are  kept  in  each  company  f 

A.  1.  A  Correspondence  Book  and  Document 
File  in  connection  therewith.  When  cor- 
respondence is  sent  out  from  or  re- 
ceived at  the  company  office  and  it  is 
desired  to  have  a  complete  record  of 
same,  it  is  entered  in  the  correspond- 
ence book  and  either  the  original  or  a 
copy  of  the  document  placed  in  the 
document  file.  Only  a  synopsis  of  the 
contents  is  entered  in  the  correspond- 
ence book  and  the  entry  is  indexed  and 
cross  indexed. 
2.  A  Sick  Report.  Immediately  after  re- 
veille each  morning,  all  soldiers  desir- 
ing to  receive  medical  treatment,  report 
to  the  orderly  room  and  their  names 
are  entered  on  the  sick  report  book. 
At  sick  call,  the  noncommissioned  of- 
ficer in  charge  of  quarters  conducts  the 
sick  to  the  hospital  where  he  presents 
the  sick  report  to  the  medical  officer 
who  in  turn  makes  such  examination 
of  the  men  and  prescribes  such  treat- 
ment as  may  be  required.  The  surgeon 
makes  entry  in  the  sick  report  indicat- 
ing whether  or  not  the  soldier  is  capa- 
ble of  performing  duty,  in  which  case 
he  either  marks  him  "hosp,"  "quar- 
ters," or  "  duty."  In  case  he  is  marked 
other  than  duty,  he  is  carried  on  the 
morning  report  as  "  sick."  A  soldier 
may  have  his  name  entered  on  the  sick 
report  at  any  time  that  he  may  become 
ill  during  the  day,  and  the  same  pro- 
cedure obtains. 
16 


3.  A  Morning  Report.  Immediately  after 
the  sick  report  has  been  returned  from 
the  hospital  the  First  Sergeant  makes 
out  his  morning  report  and  has  it  ready 
for  the  company  commander's  signa- 
ture. The  morning  report  indicates  the 
status  of  the  company  for  duty  or  ab- 
sence from  duty.  It  is  usually  sub- 
mitted to  headquarters  after  the  tactical 
work  for  the  forenoon  has  been  com- 
pleted. From  it,  the  consolidated  morn- 
ing report  of  the  command  is  made  up. 
The  morning  report  shows  the  number 
of  officers  and  enlisted  men  of  the  vari- 
ous grades  in  the  company  for  duty; 
the  number  on  extra  or  special  duty; 
the  number  present  sick;  the  num- 
ber in  arrest  or  confinement,  and  the 
number  absent.  In  mounted  commands 
the  number  of  horses  and  mules  is 
shown,  together  with  their  condition, 
serviceable  or  otherwise.  On  the  oppo- 
site page,  under  the  heading  "re- 
marks," explanation  is  made  of  any 
fact  that  makes  a  change  in  the  figures 
of  the  report  from  those  of  the  previ- 
ous day.  Ruled  columns  are  provided 
for  making  a  record  of  the  ration  and 
forage  additions  and  deductions  inci- 
dent to  men  or  animals  joining  or  leav- 
ing the  command.  In  making  out  the 
morning  report  the  principal  rule  to  be 
observed  is  that  "  every  change  in  the 
figures  of  the  previous  day's  report  must 
be  explained  by  an  appropriate  remark 
under  the  heading  of  remarks."  By 
this  means,  the  figures  may  be  readily 
checked. 

4.  A  file  of  Descriptive  Cards  of  public 
animals,  kept  in  organizations  supplied 
with  public  animals. 

5.  A  Company  Council  Book.  This  is  a 
ledger  in  which  the  account  of  the  com- 
pany fund  is  kept.  This  will  be  ex- 
plained in  detail  later. 

6.  A  Record  of  Individual  Property  re- 
sponsibility of  enlisted  men.  This  is  a 
loose-leaf   book,   each   page   of   which 


Night   Operations 


17 


contains  a  list  of  all  government  prop- 
erty in  the  hands  of  one  enlisted  man. 
A  sheet  for  each  soldier  is  prepared  and 
he  is  required  to  receipt  for  all  prop- 
erty as  he  receives  it.  The  quarter- 
master property  is  entered  on  one  side 
of  the  sheet  and  the  ordnance  property 
on  the  other. 

7.  A  Record  of  Punishments  awarded  by 
the  company  commander.  Company 
commanders  are  not  required  to  bring 
every  dereliction  of  duty  to  trial  by 
court-martial.  They  endeavor  to  pre- 
vent a  recurrence  of  an  offence  by  with- 
holding privileges  and  taking  such  steps 
as  may  be  necessary  to  enforce  their 
orders.  Company  commanders  are 
authorized  under  the  regulations,  and 
subject  to  the  control  of  the  command- 
ing officer  of  the  post,  to  dispose  of 
cases  of  derelictions  that  come  under 
the  jurisdiction  of  summary  court- 
martial  by  requiring  extra  tours  of 
fatigue,  unless  the  soldier  concerned  de- 
mands trial.  Whenever  the  company 
commander  avails  himself  of  this 
authority  he  is  required  to  enter  a 
record  of  the  offence,  and  the  action 
taken  in  the  delinquency  record  of  the 
soldier. 

8.  A  file  of  Descriptive  Lists.  (Hereto- 
fore explained.) 

9.  A  file  of  Orders  and  Instructions  re- 
ceived from  higher  authority  and  re- 
tained copies  of  rolls,  reports  and  re- 
turns required  by  regulations  or  orders. 

10.  Retained  copies  of  all  returns  of  prop- 
erty pertaining  to  the  company  and  full 
information  respecting  all  quartermas- 
ter and  other  supplies  held  on  memo- 
randum receipt,  showing  list  of  articles, 
date  of  receipt,  from  whom  received, 
and  the  name  of  the  officer  who  signed 
the  memorandum  receipt  therefor; 
also  an  account  of  all  articles  turned 
in,  expended,  stolen,  lost  or  destroyed. 
All  of  this  is  kept  on  a  loose-leaf  sys- 
tem that  is  very  simple.  Company  com- 
manders are  required  to  have  a  settle- 
ment with  the  various  staff  officers  from 
whom  they  hold  property  on  memoran- 
dum receipt,  quarterly  and  when  re- 
linquishing command,  or  when  turning 
over  the  property  to  another  officer. 

11.  A  Duty  Roster.  A  list  of  the  members 
of  the  company  and  a  record  of  the 


duty  performed  by  each.    This  is  kept 

by  the  First  Sergeant  of  the  Company. 

Note. — The  deposit  books  of  soldiers  which 

contain  a  record  of  the  money  deposited  by 

them  with  the  Quartermaster,  are  usually  kept 

on  file  in  the  company  orderly  room,     (280- 

281) 

Q.  What  inspections  are  required  to  be  made 
daily  by  company  commandersf 

A.  They  are  required  to  make  a  daily  in- 
spection of  the  men's  quarters  and  the 
kitchen,  giving  particular  attention  to 
cleanliness  and  to  the  proper  prepara- 
tion of  food.      (283) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  Saturday  Inspection? 

A.  1.  Company  commanders  are  required  to 
make  a  complete  inspection  of  their  or- 
ganization under  arms  every  Saturday. 

2.  No  one  will  be  excused  from  Satur- 
day inspection  except  the  guard  and  the 
sick  in  hospital. 

3.  Cavalry  and  field  artillery  will  habitu- 
ally be  inspected  mounted.     (283) 

Q.  Into  what  subdivisions  is  the  company 
divided? 

A.  The  company  commander  will  cause  the 
enlisted  men  of  the  company  to  be 
numbered  and  divided  into  squads,  each 
under  the  charge  of  a  noncommissioned 
officer.  As  far  as  practicable  the  men 
of  each  squad  will  b^  quartered  to- 
gether.    (284) 

Q.  What  general  rules  of  personal  hygiene 
and  sanitation  are  required  to  be  ob- 
served in  each  company? 

A.  1.  Strict  attention  will  be  paid  by  com- 
pany commanders  to  the  personal  clean- 
liness of  the  men  and  to  the  police  of 
barracks   or   tents. 

2.  The  men  are  required  to  bathe  fre- 
quently. 

3.  In  garrison  and  in  the  field,  when  prac- 
ticable, the  men  will  be  required  to  wash 
their  hands  thoroughly  after  going  to 
the  latrines  and  before  each  meal,  in 
order  to  prevent  the  transmission  of 
typhoid  fever  and  other  diseases 
through  germs  taken  into  the  mouth 
from  unclean  hands. 

4.  The  hair  will  be  kept  short  and  the 
beard,  if  one  is  worn,  kept  neatly 
trimmed. 

5.  Arms  will  be  kept  in  arm  racks.  Ac- 
coutrements and  sabres  will  be  hung 
up  by  the  belts.  Soiled  clothing  will  be 
kept  in  the  barrack  bag. 


18 


Night   Operations 


6.  A  thorough  police  of  barracks  will  pre- 
cede the  Saturday  inspection.  Chiefs 
of  squads  will  see  that  bedding  and 
bunks  are  overhauled ;  floors,  tables  and 
benches  scoured;  arms  and  accountre- 
ments  cleaned,  and  all  leather  articles 
polished.     (286-287) 

Q.  What  general  rules  regarding  uniform 
and  personal  appearance  of  the  soldier 
are  required  to  be  observed  in  the  com- 
pany? 

A.  1.  Chiefs  of  squads  are  held  responsible 
for  the  cleanliness  of  their  men.  They 
will  see  that  those  who  are  to  go  on 
duty  put  their  arras,  accoutrements  and 
clothing  in  the  best  order,  and  that  such 
as  have  passes  leave  the  post  in  the 
proper  uniform. 
2.  Soldiers  will  wear  the  uniform  in  camp 
or  garrison ;  when  on  fatigue,  they  will 
wear  the  suitable  fatigue  uniform,  (288- 
289) 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  a  company  com- 
mander with  respect  to  the  public  prop- 
erty in  the  possession  of  the  company? 

A.  The  company  commander  is  required  to 
see  that  all  property  in  the  possession 
of  the  company  is  kept  in  good  order 
and  that  missing  or  damaged  articles 
are  duly  accounted  for.  Note :  Officers 
who  sign  for  public  property,  whether 
on  invoice  or  on  memorandum  receipt, 
are  held  to  a  strict  accountability 
and  responsibility  for  same.  If  it  is 
lost  or  destroyed  and  they  do  not  take 
the  required  administrative  steps  in  the 
matter  they  will  eventually  have  to  pay 
for  it  out  of  their  private  funds.  Com- 
pany commanders  are  also  held  respon- 
sible for  text-books  and  other  official 
publications  issued  for  the  use  of  their 
companies.     (290) 

Q.  What  rules  are  required  to  be  observed 
by  enlisted  men  with  respect  to  the  care 
and  preservation  of  their  arms  and 
equipment? 

A.  1.  They  will  not  take  their  arms  apart 
except  by  permission  of  a  commissioned 
officer  and  only  in  the  manner  pre- 
scribed in  the  descriptive  pamphlet  of 
the  arm  issued  by  the  Ordnance  Depart- 
ment. 
2.  The  polishing  of  blued  or  browned 
parts  of   small   arms,   rebluing  or  re- 


browning,  putting  any  portion  of  an 
arm  in  a  fire  or  removing  a  receiver 
from  a  barrel  is  prohibited. 

3.  The  mutilation  of  any  part  by  filing  or 
otherwise,  and  attempts  to  beautify  or 
change  the  finish,  is  prohibited. 

4.  The  use  of  tompions  in  small  arms  is 
forbidden. 

5.  The  use  of  raw  linseed  oil  only  is 
authorized  for  redressing  and  the  ap- 
plication, for  such  purpose,  of  any  kind 
of  wax  or  varnish,  including  heelball, 
is  strictly  prohibited.  The  soldier  can 
produce  a  fine  finish  on  the  wood  parts 
of  his  rifle  by  the  application  of  raw 
linseed  oil  and  "  elbow  grease."  In 
order  to  set  this  finish  soldiers  some- 
times apply  one  or  more  coats  of  alco- 
hol. This  transforms  the  oil  that  has 
been  rubbed  into  the  stock,  into  a  var- 
nish and  ruins  all  the  work  that  has 
been  done  on  the  piece. 

6.  It  is  forbidden  to  use  any  dressing  or 
polishing  material  on  the  leather  ac- 
coutrements or  equipments  of  the  sol- 
dier, the  horse  equipments  for  cavalry, 
or  the  artillery  harness,  except  the  prep- 
arations supplied  for  that  purpose  by 
the  Ordnance  Department     (292) 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  a  company  comr- 
mander  with  respect  to  the  cooking  and 
m,essing  of  his  men? 

A.  1.  He  will  supervise  the  messing  and  cook- 
ing of  food  for  his  men. 

2.  He  will  see  that  his  company  is  pro- 
vided with  at  least  two  copies  of  the 
manual  for  Army  Cooks. 

3.  He  will  see  that  suitable  men  in  suffi- 
cient numbers  are  fully  instructed  in 
managing  and  cooking  the  ration  in  the 
field. 

4.  He  will  see  that  necessary  utensils 
and  implements,  in  serviceable  condi- 
tion for  cooking,  both  in  garrison  and 
in  the  field,  are  always  on  hand,  to- 
gether with  the  field  mess  furniture 
for  each  man.     (296) 

Q.  What  are  the  general  rules  for  the  ad- 
ministration of  the  company  mess? 
A.  1.  The  kitchen  will  be  placed  under  the 
immediate  charge  of  a  noncommissioned 
officer,  who  will  be  held  responsible  for 
its  condition  and  for  the  proper  use  of 
rations. 
2.  No  one,  except  those  who  go  there  on 


Night   Operations 


19 


duty,  or  are  employed  therein,  will  be 
allowed  to  visit  or  remain  in  the  kitchen. 

3.  The  greatest  care  will  be  observed  in 
cleaning  and  scouring  cooking  utensils. 

4,  The  food  of  prisoners  will  be  sent  to 
their  places  of  confinement,  when  prac- 
ticable, but  post  commanders  may  ar- 
range to  send  prisoners,  under  proper 
guard,  to  their  company  messes.     (297) 

Q.  What  department  furnishes  kitchen  and 

tableware  and  mess  furniture? 
A.  The  Quartermaster's  Department.  Al- 
lowances are  announced  in  orders. 
Articles  broken,  lost  or  damaged  are 
charged  to  the  individuals  at  fault. 
(301) 
Q.  Of  what  does  the  field  mess  furniture  of 

the  soldier  consist? 
A.  It  is  limited  to  one  tin  cup,  one  knife, 
one  fork,   one  spoon  and  such   device 
for  cooking  as  may  be  furnished  by  the 
Ordnance     Department.       The     article 
now  provided  for  individual  cooking  is 
named  the  meat  can.     (302) 
Note. — There  is  probably  no  phase  of  com- 
pany administration  that  will  pay  such  large 
dividends    in    contentmenc,    happiness    and 
esprit  de  corps,  as  a  good  company  mess. 
The  company  commander  who  has   a  poor 
mess  will  have  a  poor  company.     The  per- 
sonnel  of   the   culinary   department   of   the 
company  consists  of  the  Mess  Sergeant,  who 
is  detailed  from  the  sergeants  of  the  com- 
pany; two  cooks  appointed  by  the  company 
commander ;  the  necessary  number  of  kitchen 
police,  detailed  daily  by  roster  from  the  pri- 
vates of  the  company ;  a  dining  room  orderly, 
who   is,  as  a  rule,  detailed  by  the  month; 
and  a  private  detailed  in  the  kitchen  to  learn 
cooking. 

The  Mess  Sergeant  is  in  charge  of  the  com- 
pany mess  under  the  supervision  of  the  com- 
pany commander.  He  makes  the  purchases 
of  supplies  and  provides  the  cooks  with  the 
materials  necessary  for  the  bill  of  fare  for 
each  meal.  He  sees  that  the  personnel  con- 
nected with  the  mess  perform  their  duties 
properly  and  that  the  food,  in  sufficient  quan- 
tity and  excellent  quality,  is  properly  pre- 
pared and  promptly  served  at  the  hour  desig- 
nated. 

The  company  cooks  are  selected  for  their 
special  qualifications.  They  receive  the  same 
pay  as  the  sergeants  and  in  many  cases  re- 
ceive special  training  for  the  work  in  one  of 


the   several   schools   for  army  cooks   main- 
tained by  the  War  Department. 

The  kitchen  police  are  charged  with  the 
scullery  work  of  the  kitchen.  They  prepare 
the  vegetables,  wash  and  dry  the  dishes, 
scrub  the  kitchen  utensils  and,  when  mess  is 
served,  act  as  waiters  in  the  dining  room. 

The  dining  room  orderly  is  charged,  under 
the  direction  of  the  mess  sergeant,  with  the 
care  of  the  tableware  and  table  equipment 
of  the  mess.  He  keeps  an  accurate  account 
of  all  articles  and,  when  any  are  broken, 
makes  report  of  same  in  order  that  it  may 
be  charged  against  the  person  at  fault.  He 
sees  that  the  tables  are  set  and  that  the  mess 
stools  are  in  place  at  the  proper  time.  He 
assists  in  waiting  on  the  table  during  mess 
hours  and  helps  to  wash  and  dry  the  dishes. 
The  private  detailed  in  the  kitchen  to  learn 
cooking  is  one  of  the  necessary  utilities  of 
the  company.  The  company  commander 
never  knows  when  he  is  going  to  lose  a  cook 
from  one  cause  or  another  and  it  is  abso- 
lutely necessary  to  have  available  a  man  who 
can  be  put  into  the  kitchen  and  who  is  capa- 
ble of  doing  the  work  in  a  satisfactory  man- 
ner should  one  of  the  cooks  be  absent.  There 
is  only  one  way  to  have  such  a  man  avail- 
able and  that  is  to  instruct  him  beforehand. 
The  far-sighted  company  qpmmander  al- 
ways has  several  men  in  the  company  who 
have  received  training  in  the  kitchen. 

There  are  several  methods  of  making  the 
bill  of  fare  in  the  service.  Some  company 
commanders  have  the  mess  sergeant  make  up 
the  bill  of  fare  from  day  to  day,  and  submit 
that  for  the  succeeding  day,  at  the  morning 
inspection.  The  writer  has  used  the  fol- 
lowing method  with  success  over  a  period 
of  a  number  of  years :  Make  up  a  bill  of 
fare  providing  for  each  meal  from  Monday 
morning  at  breakfast  until  Sunday  night  at 
supper.  Repeat  this  bill  of  fare  each  week. 
Change  the  items  from  time  to  time  accord- 
ing to  the  season  and  locality,  providing 
such  articles  of  food  as  the  market  aflfords. 
This  method  has  been  carefully  worked  out 
and  given  a  thorough  trial  under  varying 
conditions  of  the  service  and  has  proved 
eminently  successful.  If  you  ever  have  the 
opportunity,  give  it  a  fair  trial.  (Ed.) 
Q.  What  are  the  several  councils  of  adminis- 
tration f 
A.  1.  The  Post  Exchange  Council.  The 
Post  Exchange  Council  is  composed  of 


20 


Night   Operations 


the  ofl&cer  in  charge  of  the  Post  Ex- 
change and  the  commanding  officer  of 
each  organization  participating  in  the 
Exchange.  The  Council  meets  at  the 
end  of  each  month  and  at  other  times 
when  necessary.  They  audit  the  Post 
Exchange  fund,  and  examine  into  the 
methods  by  which,  and  the  sources 
from  which,  such  fund  has  accrued. 
As  a  rule  this  council  appoints  a  com- 
mittee of  its  members  for  consultation 
with  the  Post  Exchange  Officer  in  the 
conduct  of  the  business  of  the  Ex- 
change. The  Council  fixes  laundry 
charges  and  prices  to  be  charged  by 
company  tailors,  shoemakers,  etc.,  for 
making  repairs  to  uniforms. 

2.  The  Company  Council.  Composed  of  all 
officers  present  for  duty  with  the  com- 
pany. It  meets  on  the  last  day  of  each 
month.  It  audits  the  company  fund; 
examines  into  the  sources  from  which 
the  company  fund  has  accrued;  ap- 
proves the  expenditures  made  from  the 
fund  and  transacts  such  other  business 
as  may  be  necessary  with  respect  to  the 
expenditure  of  the  fund. 

3.  The  Aero  Squadron  Council.  Corre- 
sponds to  the  company  council  and  its 
duties  with  respect  to  the  fund  of  the 
aero  squadron  are  the  same.  It  is  com- 
posed of  the  squadron  commander,  the 
second  ranking  officer  in  the  squadron 
and  the  squadron  mess  officer. 

4.  The  Mess  Council.  Composed  of  the 
Mess  officer  and  the  commanders  of  the 
several  organizations  participating  in 
a  general  mess.  They  audit  the  mess 
funds  and  make  recommendations  for 
the  conduct  of  the  general  mess.  The 
general  mess  is  fast  disappearing  from 
the  service  so  that  the  necessity  for  the 
mess  council  will  soon  cease  to  exist. 
(316-321) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  loss  of  regi- 
mental, company,  post  exchange  or  mess 
funds  occurs? 

A.  The  circumstances  must  be  carefully  in- 
vestigated and  reported  upon  by  a  board 
of  three  officers,  who  make  recommen- 
dations to  the  department  commander 
as  to  responsibility.     (321) 

Q.  What  limitation  with  respect  to  the  ex- 
penditure of  company,  regimental  and 


mess  funds  is  placed  upon  their  cus- 
todians? 

A.  The  purchase  of  any  article  which  can 
be  obtained  on  requisition  from  a  sup- 
ply department  is  forbidden,  except 
that,  with  the  approval  of  the  post  com- 
mander, such  articles  may  be  purchased 
if  necessity  exists  for  their  immediate 
use  and  they  are  not  on  hand  for  issue 
at  the  post.     (322) 

Q.  What  are  the  rules  governing  the  trans- 
fer of  regimental,  company  and  mess 
funds  from  one  officer  to  another? 

A.  1.  No  officer  is  permitted  to  take  these 
funds  away  from  the  post  where  the  or- 
ganization to  which  they  pertain  is  sta- 
tioned, except  for  deposit  in  a  bank,  or 
to  pay  indebtedness. 

2.  Should  the  officer  who  is  custodian  of 
any  of  these  funds  be  absent  from  the 
post  for  a  period  of  from  3  to  10  days, 
he  will  leave  the  funds  with  the  of- 
ficer acting  in  his  place,  taking  a  memo- 
randum receipt  therefor.  If  an  officer 
is  to  be  absent  for  more  than  10  days 
he  will  regularly  transfer  the  funds  to 
his  successor. 

3.  In  transferring  funds  to  a  successor, 
the  accountable  officer  will  enter  in  the 
council  book  a  statement  showing  all 
outstanding  indebtedness  and  will  enter 
and  sign  the  following  certificate: 

"  I  certify,  to  the  best  of  my  knowl- 
edge and  belief,  that  the  following  is  a 
complete  and  accurate  statement  of  all 
outstanding  debts  and  obligations,  to 
date,  payable  from  this  fund." 

In  case  there  are  no  outstanding  debts 
or  obligations  he  will  certify  accord- 
ingly.    (324) 

Q.  Under  what  designation  are  company 
funds  deposited  in  a  hank? 

A.  They  will  be  placed  under  their  official 
designation.  For  example :  "  Company 
Fund,  Company  '  H,'  29th  Infantry." 
They  will  not  be  placed  to  the  credit 
of  th^  officer  who  is  the  custodian. 
(324) 

Q.  From  what  sources  do  the  regimental 
fund  accrue? 

A.  1.  The    percentage    received    from    band 
engagements.     This   is   usually   10  per 
cent  of  the  gross  amount  received. 
2.  The  percentage  of  the  Post  Exchange 


Night   Operations 


21 


profits.  The  regulations  require  that 
when  a  dividend  is  declared  by  the  Post 
Exchange,  at  least  5  per  cent,  and  as 
much  more  as  the  council  will  allow, 
will  be  paid  over  to  the  regimental  fund. 

3,  From  contributions.  In  some  organiza- 
tions the  officers  contribute  one  day's 
pay  each  year  to  the  regimental  fund. 

4.  From  any  other  legitimate  source. 
(325) 

Q.  Who  is  the  custodian  of  the  regimental 
fund? 

A.  The  adjutant  of  the  regiment.    (325) 

Q.  From  what  sources  do  the  company  fund 
accrue? 

A.  1.  Savings  on  rations.  This  money  is  ac- 
counted for  under  the  mess  section  of 
the  company  fund. 

2.  The  amounts  received  from  Post  Ex- 
change Dividends.  When  the  profits  of 
the  Post  Exchange  show  a  balance  over 
and  above  the  outstanding  liabilities 
the  council  usually  distributes  this 
money  by  declaring  a  dividend  which  is 
paid  to  the  companies  on  the  basis  of 
the  stock  held,  or  according  to  the 
amount  expended  in  the  exchange  by  the 
members  of  the  company,  or  a  com- 
bination of  the  two  methods. 

3.  All  other  moneys  accruing  from  per- 
centages or  profits  from  pool  and  bil- 
liard tables  installed  in  the  company 
library  and  amusement  room  and  from 
tailor  and  barber  shops.     (327) 

Q.  Who   is   the   custodian   of   the   company 

fund? 
A.  The  company  commander.     (327) 

Note. — The  company  fund  is  divided  into 
two  classes,  the  general  fund  and  the  mess 
fund.  The  mess  fund  accrues  from  savings 
that  may  be  made  on  rations  and  it  may  be 
expended  only  for  articles  or  supplies  that 
are  consumed  or  used  exclusively  in  the  com- 
pany mess.  The  general  fund  consists  of  all 
other  moneys  accruing  to  the  company,  and 
may  be  expended  for  any  article  for  the 
benefit  of  the  whole  company  which  cannot  be 
supplied  by  a  supply  department.  When  the 
mess  fund  of  a  company  runs  low,  money 
from  the  general  fund  may  be  borrowed  to 
replenish  it.  The  reverse  of  this  rule  does  not 
hold. 

Q.  What  is  a  roster? 

A.  A  roster  is  a  list  of  officers  and  men  for 
duty,  with  a  record  of  the  duty  per- 
formed by  each. 


Note. — Generally  details  for  duty  are  made 
so  that  the  one  longest  off  is  the  first  for 
detail.     Details  so  made  are  said  to  be  made 
by  roster.     (355) 
Q.  What  are  the  classes  of  duty  performed 

by  roster? 
A.  1.  Outposts. 

2.  Interior  guards,  including  stable  guards. 

3.  Detachments  to  protect  laborers  on 
military  works. 

4.  Armed  working  parties  on  such  works. 
The   above   constitute   duties   of   the  first 

class.     Soldiers  march  armed  and,  if  neces- 
sary, fully  equipped  on  all  duties  of  this  class. 
The  second  class  comprises  all  other  duties 
and  fatigue,  in  or  out  of  the  garrison  or  camp. 
The  rosters  are  distinct  for  each  class.    (357) 
Q.  What  are  the  several  duty  rosters? 
A.  1.  Lieutenant-colonels     and    majors     are 
on  one  roster,  and  may  be  detailed  when 
the  importance  of  the  duty  requires  it. 
In  the  field,  their  roster  is  kept  at  divi- 
sion and  brigade  headquarters. 

2.  Captains  form  one  roster  and  are  ex- 
empt from  ordinary  fatigue  duties. 

3.  Lieutenants  form  one  roster,  but  when 
conditions  make  it  advisable  captains 
and  lieutenants  may  be  placed  on  one 
roster,  or  one  or  more  of  the  senior 
lieutenants  may  be  placed  on  the  cap- 
tains' roster. 

4.  Sergeants,  corporals,  musicians  and 
privates  form  distinct  rosters.     (358) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  performance  of 
duty  by  roster? 

A.  In  making  details  by  roster,  an  officer  or 
enlisted  man  is  each  day  charged  with 
the  number  of  days  that  he  has  remained 
present  and  available  since  the  beginning 
of  his  last  tour.  Departures  from  this 
rule  may  be  authorized  by  the  com- 
manding officer  whenever  a  strict  ap- 
plication would  allow  improper  advan- 
tage or  work  hardship.     (360) 

Q.  When  are  credits  given  for  tours  of  duty? 

A.  1.  Duties  of  the  first  class  are  credited  on 
the  roster  when  the  guards  or  detach- 
ments have  passed  the  chain  of  sentinels, 
or  an  interior  guard  has  reached  its 
post. 
2.  Duties  of  the  second  class  are  credited 
when  those  detailed  therefor  hare 
entered  upon  their  performance. 
Note.— Except  in   case   of   emergency   no 

duty  is  required  of  the  old  Officer  of  the  Day 


22 


Night  Operations 


or  the  old  guard  until  four  hours  after  they 

have  been  relieved.     (362) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  daily  service  in 

garrison  or  camp? 
A.  1.  There  will  be  daily,  Sundays  and  holi- 
days excepted,  at  least  two  roll-calls, 
viz. :  Reveille  and  retreat. 
Note. — The  roll  is  called  on  the  company 
parade  by  the  First  Sergeant,  superintended 
by  a  commissioned  officer.    In  camp  the  squad 
leaders  report  their  squads,  in  lieu  of  the  roll 
call  prescribed    for   garrison.     When    com- 
panies are  quartered  together  or  in  contigu- 
ous barracks,  one  officer  may  superintend  the 
roll  call  of  two  or  more  companies.    This  is 
usually  done  by  the  officer  of  the  day. 

2.  Ordinarily  there  will  not  be  any  forma- 
tion at  tattoo.  The  call  will  be  sounded, 
and  15  minutes  thereafter,  lights  in 
squad  rooms  will  be  extinguished  and 
loud  talking  and  noises  will  cease. 

3.  Call  to  quarters  will  be  sounded  at  10.45 
P.M.,  and  taps  at  11.  At  taps  all  lights 
not  authorized  by  the  commanding 
officer  will  be  extinguished. 

4.  Reveille  roll-call  in  garrison  will  not 
ordinarily  take  place  earlier  than  5.30 
a.m;.,  in  summer,  nor  6.30  a.m.,  in  win- 
ter. On  Sundays  and  holidays  reveille 
roll  call  may  be  dispensed  with.    (370) 

Q.  What  are  the  regulations  governing  the 
time  of  the  soldier's  mess? 

A.  1.  For  breakfast,  thirty  minutes  after  re- 
veille roll  call. 

2.  For  dinner,  not  earlier  than  12  and  not 
later  than  12.15. 

3.  For  supper,  not  earlier  than  5  and  not 
later  than  6.30  p.m. 

4.  Meals  are  required  to  be  served 
promptly  at  the  hours  appointed.  The 
men  will  be  allowed  at  least  20  minutes 
for  breakfast  and  supper  and  thirty 
minutes  for  dinner.     (371) 

Q.  With  what  military  honors  are  the  Presi- 
dent and  Vice-president  received? 

A.  With  regimental  colors  or  standards 
drooping,  officers  and  troops  saluting, 
and  the  bands  playing  "The  Star 
Spangled  Banner,"  or  in  the  absence  of 
a  band,  the  field  music  or  bugles  sound- 
ing "  to  the  color."     (375) 

Q.  With  what  military  honors  are  General 
officers  of  the  Army  received? 

A.  Officers  of  the  following  grades  of  rank 
will  be  received  with  regimental  stand- 
ards  or  colors   drooping,   officers  and 


troops  saluting  and  the  bands  or  field 
music  playing  as  follows : 

(c)  The     General :     The     General's 

March. 
(&)  The     Lieutenant     General: 
trumpets  sounding  three  flour- 
ishes,  or   drums  beating  three 
ruffles. 

(c)  A     Major     General:     trumpets 

sounding    two     flourishes,     or 
drums  beating  two  ruffles. 

(d)  A   Brigadier   General:   trumpets 

sounding  one  flourish,  or  drums 
beating  one  ruffle.     (375) 

Q.  What  military  honors  are  rendered  to  the 
National  Color? 

A.  1.  The  National  or  Regimental  Color  or 
Standard,  uncased,  passing  a  guard  or 
other  armed  body  will  be  saluted,  the 
field  music  sounding  "to  the  color"  or 
"to  the  standard." 
2.  Officers  and  enlisted  men  passing  the 
uncased  color  will  render  the  prescribed 
salute ;  with  no  arms  in  the  hand,  the 
salute  will  be  the  hand  salute,  using  the 
right  hand.  The  head  dress  will  not  be 
removed.     {Z77) 

Q.  Whenever  "  The  Star  Spangled  Banner  " 
is  played,  what  action  is  taken? 

A.  Whenever  "The  Star  Spangled  Banner" 
is  played  at  a  military  station  or  at  any 
place  where  persons  belonging  to  the 
military  service  are  present  in  their  of- 
ficial capacity  or  present  unofficially  but 
in  uniform,  all  officers  and  enlisted  men 
will  stand  at  attention,  facing  towards 
the  music,  except  at  retreat,  when  they 
will  face  towards  the  flag,  retaining  that 
position  until  the  last  note  of  the  an- 
them, and  then  salute.  With  no  arms  in 
the  hand  the  salute  will  be  the  hand 
salute.  If  not  in  uniform  and  covered, 
they  shall  uncover  at  the  first  note  of 
the  anthem,  holding  the  headdress  op- 
posite the  left  shoulder  and  so  remain 
until  its  close,  except  that  in  inclement 
weather  the  headdress  may  be  slightly 
raised.  The  same  rules  apply  when 
to  the  color  or  to  the  standard  is 
sounded  as  when  the  National  Anthem 
is  played.  When  played  by  an  Army 
band,  the  National  Anthem  shall  be 
played  through  without  repetition  of  any 
part  not  required  to  be  repeated  to  make 
it  complete.  The  same  marks  of  respect 
prescribed    for   observance    during   the 


Night   Operations 


23 


playing  of  the  National  Anthem  of  the 
United  States  shall  be  shown  toward 
the  national  anthem  of  any  other  country 
when  played  upon  official  occasions. 
(378). 

Q.  What  rules  govern  military  courtesies  and 
salutes   between   oHHcersf 

A.  1.  When  making  or  receiving  official  re- 
ports, all  officers  will  salute ;  officers  and 
enlisted  men  passing  the  uncased  color 
will  render  honors  as  follows :  If  in 
uniform,  they  will  salute  with  the  hand, 
sabre  or  rifle,  as  may  be;  if  in  civilian 
dress  and  covered,  they  will  uncover, 
holding  the  headdress  opposite  the  left 
shoulder  with  the  right  hand;  if  un- 
covered, they  will  salute  with  the  hand 
salute. 

2.  When  under  arms,  the  salute  is  made 
with  the  sabre,  if  drawn :  otherwise  with 
the  hand. 

3.  On  meeting,  all  officers  when  covered 
salute. 

4.  Military  courtesy  requires  the  junior 
to  salute  first,  but  when  the  salute  is 
introductory  to  a  report  made  at  a  mili- 
tary ceremony  or  formation  to  the  rep- 
resentative of  a  common  superior — for 
example:  to  the  adjutant,  officer  of  the 
day,  etc. — the  officer  making  the  report, 
whatever  his  rank,  will  salute  first. 
The  officer  to  whom  the  report  is  made 
will  acknowledge,  by  saluting  if  cov- 
ered, or  verbally,  if  uncovered,  that  he 
has  received  and  understood  the  report. 
(381) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  military  salutes  of 
enlisted  men? 

A.  1.  Uncovering  is  not  a  form  of  the  pre- 
scribed salute. 

2.  When  an  enlisted  man  with  no  arms  in 
hand  passes  an  officer,  he  salutes  with 
the  right  hand.  Officers  are  saluted 
whether  in  uniform  or  not. 

3.  An  enlisted  man  armed  with  the  sabre 
and  out  of  ranks,  salutes  all  officers  with 
the  sabre,  if  drawn,  otherwise  he  salutes 
with  the  hand.  If  on  foot,  and  armed 
with  a  rifle,  he  makes  the  rifle  salute. 
Except  in  the  field,  in  campaign  or  under 
simulated  campaign  conditions,  a 
mounted  soldier  dismounts  before  ad- 
dressing an  officer  not  mounted. 

4.  A  noncommissioned  officer  or  private  in 
command  of  a  detachment  without 
arms,  salutes  all  officers  with  the  hand, 


but  if  the  detachment  be  on  foot  and 
armed  with  the  rifle,  he  makes  the  rifle 
salute  and,  if  armed  with  the  sabre,  he 
salutes  with  it. 

5.  An  enlisted  man,  if  seated,  rises  on  the 
approach  of  an  officer,  faces  towards 
him  and  salutes.  If  standing,  he  faces 
the  officer  for  the  same  purpose.  If  the 
parties  remain  in  the  same  place  or  on 
the  same  ground,  such  compliments  need 
not  be  repeated. 

6.  Soldiers  actually  at  work  do  not  cease 
work  to  salute  an  officer  unless  they  are 
addressed  by  him. 

7.  Before  addressing  an  officer,  an  en- 
listed man  makes  the  prescribed  salute 
with  the  weapon  with  which  he  is  armed, 
or,  if  unarmed,  with  the  hand.  He  also 
makes  the  same  salute  after  receiving 
a  reply. 

8.  Indoors,  except  under  the  conditions 
stated  below,  an  unarmed  enlisted  man 
uncovers  and  stands  at  attention  on  the 
approach  of  an  officer.  If  armed  he 
salutes  as  heretofore  stated.  On  all  oc- 
casions outdoors,  and  also  in  public 
places,  such  as  stores,  theatres,  railway 
and  steamboat  stations  and  the  like,  the 
salute  to  any  person  whatever  by  offi- 
cers and  enlisted  men  in  uniform  with 
no  arms  in  the  hand,  whether  on  or  off 
duty,  shall  be  the  hand  salute,  the  right 
hand  being  used,  the  headdress  not 
being  removed. 

9.  When  an  officer  enters  the  room  where 
there  are  soldiers,  the  word  "  Attention  " 
is  given  by  someone  who  perceives  him, 
when  all  rise  and  remain  standing  at 
attention  until  the  officer  leaves  the 
room.  Soldiers  at  meals  stop  eating, 
but  do  not  rise. 

10.  Soldiers  at  all  times  and  in  all  situa- 
tions pay  the  same  compliments  to  offi- 
cers of  the  Army,  Navy,  Marine  Corps, 
and  Volunteers,  and  to  officers  of  the 
Organized  Militia  in  uniform,  as  to  offi- 
cers of  their  own  corps,  regiment,  or 
arm  of  the  service. 

11.  Officers  will  always  acknowledge  the 
courtesies  of  enlisted  men  by  returnir^ 
their  salutes.  When  several  officers  in 
company  are  saluted,  all  return  the 
salute.     (382-391) 

Q.  What  are  the  general  rules  regarding  the 
time  of  firing  of  salutes  with  cannon? 


d4 


Night  Operations 


A.  1.  Salutes  will  not  be  fired  between  sunset 
and  sunrise,  nor  on  Sunday,  unless  re- 
quired by  international  courtesy.  As  a 
general  rule  they  will  be  fired  between 
8  A.M.,  and  sunset 
2.  The  National  Flag  will  always  be  dis- 
played at  the  time  of  firing  a  salute. 
(393) 
Q.  What  is  the  National  Salute f 

A.  Twenty-one  guns.  The  National  Salute  is 
fired  at  12  o'clock  noon  on  Memorial 
Day,  May  30th,  at  all  posts  and  stations 
provided   with  artillery.      (398) 

Q.  What  is  the  Salute  to  the  Union? 

A.  The  Salute  to  the  Union  consists  of  one 
gun  for  each  State.  It  is  commem- 
orative of  the  Declaration  of  Inde- 
pendence and  is  fired  at  12  o'clock  noon 
on  July  4th,  at  every  post  of  the  Army 
provided  with  suitable  artillery.    (398) 

Q.  What  salute  is  rendered  to  the  President? 

A.  The  President,  both  upon  his  arrival  at, 
and  departure  from,  a  military  post,  or 
when  in  its  vicinity,  receives  a  salute  of 
21  guns.  No  other  personal  salute  is 
fired  in  his  presence.  (400) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  raising  and  lower- 
ing of  the  Hag  at  a  military  post? 

A.  The  flag  is  hoisted  at  the  sounding  of  the 
first  note  of  the  reveille,  or  at  the  first 
note  of  the  march,  if  a  march  be  played 
before  the  reveille. 
The  flag  will  be  lowered  at  the  sounding 
of  the  last  note  of  retreat,  and  while  the 
flag  is  being  lowered  the  band  will  play 
"  The  Star  Spangled  Banner "  or,  if 
there  be  no  band  present,  the  field  music 
will  sound  "  to  the  color."  When  "  to 
the  color  "  is  being  sounded  by  the  field 
music  and  the  flag  is  being  lowered,  the 
same  respect  will  be  observed  as  when 
"  The  Star  Spangled  Banner  "  is  being 
played  by  the  band.  In  either  case, 
officers  and  enlisted  men  out  of  ranks 
will  face  towards  the  flag,  stand  at  at- 
tention, and  render  the  prescribed  salute 
at  the  last  note  of  the  music. 
Note. — The  flag  is  hoisted  at  reveille  and 

lowered  at  retreat  by  a  detachment  of  the 

guard,  consisting  of  a  nonconmiissioned  offi- 
cer and  two  privates.    (437) 

Q.  What  are  the  rules  governing  the  muster 
of  troops? 

A.  1.  Troops  will  be  mustered  for  pay  on 


the  last  day  of  each  month  unless  other- 
wise ordered  by  the  War  Department. 

2.  Each  stated  muster  will,  when  prac- 
ticable, be  preceded  by  a  minute  and 
careful  inspection. 

3.  If  the  command  consists  of  more  than 
one  company,  the  inspection  will  be  pre- 
ceded by  a  review. 

4.  If  the  day  for  muster  falls  on  Sun- 
day, the  review  and  inspection  will  be 
omitted.     (439) 

Q.  Describe  the  military  ceremony  at  a  mili- 
tary post  on  Memorial  Day? 

A.  1.  On  Memorial  Day,  May  30th,  at  all 
Army  posts  and  stations,  the  national 
flag  will  be  displayed  at  half-staff  from 
reveille  till  midday.  Immediately  be- 
fore noon  the  band,  or  field  music,  will 
play  some  appropriate  air,  and  the  Na- 
tional Salute  of  21  guns  will  be  fired  at 
12  o'clock  noon  at  all  posts  provided 
with  artillery. 

2.  At  the  close  of  this  memorial  tribute, 
at  noon,  the  flag  will  be  hoisted  to  the 
top  of  the  staff  and  remain  there  until 
retreat. 

3.  When  the  flag  has  been  hoisted  to  the 
top  of  the  staff,  it  will  be  saluted  by 
playing  one  or  more  appropriate  patri- 
otic airs.     (400) 

Q.  Distinguish    between  property   accounta- 
bility and  property  responsibility? 
A.  1.  Property  accountability.    When  an  of- 
ficer receives  public  property  for  which 
he  is  required  to  render  periodical  re- 
turns, he  is  said  to  be  accountable  for 
the  property. 
2.  Property  responsibility.     When  an  of- 
ficer receives  public  property  for  which 
he  is  not  required  to  render  a  return, 
he   is   said  to  be   responsible   for   the 
property. 
Note. — Under    the   existing   system,    com- 
pany commanders  are  only  accountable  for 
the  property  which  forms  the  Unit  Equip- 
ment of  his  company.    This  consists  of  cer- 
tain articles  of  Ordnance  and  Signal  prop- 
erty.   All  of  the  other  equipment  of  the  com- 
pany is  issued  by  the  Quartermaster  or  Ord- 
nance Officer  on  memorandum  receipt  and  the 
company  commander  is  only  responsible — not 
accountable — for    it.    With    respect    to    this 
class    of    property,    the    Quartermaster    and 
Ordnance    Officer    are   accountable   because 
they  are  required  to  render  periodical  returns 


Night  Operations 


25 


for  the  property  to  the  chiefs  of  their  re- 
spective departments.  A  responsible  officer 
is  not  relieved  from  responsibility  for  public 
property  for  which  he  has  given  memoran- 
dum receipts  until  he  has  returned  the  prop- 
erty to  the  accountable  officer  or  has  secured 
memorandum  receipts  from  his  successor,  or 
until  he  has  been  otherwise  relieved  by  the 
operation  of  regulations  or  orders.  (657- 
Ed.) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  transfer  of  prop- 
erty from  one  oMcer  to  another? 
A.  1.  If  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  public 
property  of  a  command    (not  property 
pertaining  to  a  company  or  detachment) 
is,  by  order,  leave  of  absence,  or  any 
other  cause,  separated  from  it,  the  com- 
manding officer,  or  another  officer  desig- 
nated by  him,  will  receipt  and  account 
for  it. 
2.  A  company  or  detachment  commander 
is  responsible  for  all  property  pertain- 
ing to  his  company  or  detachment,  and 
will    not     transfer    his     accountability 
therefor  to  a  successor  during  periods 
of  absence  of  less  than  a  month  unless 
so    ordered    by    competent    authority. 
When  such  absence  exceeds   a  month, 
the  question  of  responsibility  will  be  de- 
termined by  proper  authority.     (659) 
Q.  What  is  the  status  of  an  officer  with  re- 
spect   to    the    property    responsibility, 
when  he  is  in  temporary  command  of 
the  company  f 
A.  The  officer  in  temporary  command  of  a 
company  is  responsible  for  the  property 
pertaining  thereto  whether  he  receipts 
for  it  or  not.     (662) 
Q.  May  property  responsibility  be  transferred 

to  enlisted  men? 
A.  The  property  responsibility  of  a  company 
commander  cannot  be  transferred  to  an 
enlisted  man.  It  is  his  duty  to  attend 
personally  to  its  security.  {66Z) 
Q.  Describe  the  procedure  in  the  transfer  of 
public  property  from  one  officer  to 
another? 
A.  Accountability.  The  return  for  the  prop- 
erty is  made  out  and  the  receiving  of- 
ficer enters  thereon  a  statement  that  all 
the  property  accounted  for  as  on  hand 
and  transferred  to  successor  has  been 
received  by  him.  The  transferring  of- 
ficer will  similarly  enter  on  the  return 
a   statement  that  all  the  property  has 


been  transferred  to  his  successor  and 
actually  turned  over  to  him. 
Responsibility:  The  officer  transferring 
the  property  procures  a  memorandum 
receipt  from  his  successor  for  the  prop- 
erty. He  takes  this  to  the  officer  ac- 
countable for  the  property,  turns  it  over 
to  him  and  receives  his  old  receipts, 
which  transaction  ends  his  responsi- 
bility.    (665) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  by  an  officer  on  the 
receipt  of  public  property  which  has 
been  invoiced  to  him  or  for  which  he  has 
given  memorandum  receipts? 

A.  1.  He  will  make  a  careful  examination  of 
the  property  to  ascertain  its  quantity 
and  condition,  but  will  not  break  origfi- 
nal  packages  until  issues  are  to  be  made, 
unless  he  has  reason  to  believe  the  con- 
tents defective. 

2.  Should  he  find  defects  or  shortage  he 
will  apply  for  a  survey  to  fix  the  re- 
sponsibility. 

3.  Should  he  consider  the  property  unfit 
for  use  he  will  submit  inventories  in 
duplicate  and  request  the  action  of  an 
inspector.     (668) 

Q.  How  will  public  property  be  branded  be- 
fore it  is  used? 

A.  It  will  be  branded  "  U.  S."     (676) 

Q.  With  reference  to  its  disposition,  into  what 
classes  is  unserviceable  property 
divided? 

A.  1.  Property  worn  out  by  fair  wear  and 
tear  in  the  service  which  has  no  salable 
value. 

2.  Property  worn  out  by  fair  wear  and 
tear  in  the  service  which  presumably 
has  some  salable  value. 

3.  Property  which  has  been  rendered  un- 
serviceable from  causes  other  than  fair 
wear  and  tear  in  the  service. 

Property  of  the  first  class  may  be  submitted 
to  a  surveying  officer  and  destroyed,  or  it 
may  be  submitted  to  an  inspector  without 
the  prior  action  of  a  surveying  officer. 

Property  of  the  second  class  will  be  sub- 
mitted to  an  inspector  without  the  prior  ac- 
tion of  a  surveying  officer. 

Property  of  the  third  class  will  be  sub- 
mitted for  the  action  of  a  surveying  officer 
and,  unless  destroyed,  will  subsequently  be 
submitted  to  an  inspector. 

Note. — In  the  case  of  unserviceable  prop- 
erty worn  out  by  fair  wear  and  tear  in  the 


26 


Night   Operations 


service  and  which  has  no  salable  value,  sur- 
vey reports  will  be  made  out  and  disposed  of 
as  indicated  heretofore.    If  the  surveying  of- 
ficer finds  the  conditions  as  stated  he  will  find 
that  "  the  property  is  not  fit  for  further  use 
in  the  military  service;  that  its  condition  is 
due  to  fair  wear  and  tear  in  the  service,  and 
that  it  has  no  salable  value."    He  will  recom- 
mend   "  that    the    property    be    destroyed." 
When  the  commanding  officer  approves  such 
finding  and  recommendation  he  will  call  for 
the  property  to  be  submitted  to  him  for  ex- 
amination  and    after    examining   same    will 
order  it  destroyed  and  detail  an  officer  to  wit- 
ness the  destruction.    The  property,  with  the 
survey  report,  is  then  turned  over  to  the  of- 
ficer who  witnesses  the  destruction  of  same 
and  certifies  at  the  bottom  of  page  3  of  the 
report  to  such  destruction.     Two  copies  of 
the   report  are  then   forwarded   to   the   ac- 
countable officer  to  be  used  as  vouchers  to  his 
returns  and  the  third  copy  forwarded  to  head- 
quarters of  the  territorial  department  for  ad- 
ministrative examination  and  file.     (678-Ed.) 
Q.  How  is  the  cause  of  damage  to,  and  the 
loss  and  destruction  of,  military  prop- 
erty classified? 
A.  1.  Unavoidable  causes,  being  those  over 
which  the  responsible  officers  have  no 
control,  occurring  (a)   in  the  ordinary 
course  of  service,  or  (b)  as  an  incident 
to  an  active  campaign. 
2.  Avoidable  causes,  those  due  to  careless- 
ness, wilfulness  or  neglect.     (682) 
Q.  To  what  extent  are  officers  who  hold  pub- 
lic property  in   their  custody  held  re- 
sponsible? 
A.  Officers   responsible   for   public   property 
will  be  charged  for  any  damage  to,  or 
destruction   of,   the   same,   and   money 
value    will    be    deducted    from    their 
monthly  pay  unless  they  show  to  the 
satisfaction  of  the  Secretary  of  War,  by 
their  own  affidavits,  or  by  their  certifi- 
cates supported  by  affidavits  of  others, 
that  the  damage,  loss  or  destruction  was 
occasioned  by  unavoidable  causes  and 
without  fault  or  neglect  on  their  part. 
(683) 
Q.  How  is  property  expended  in  the  military 

service  accounted  for? 
A.  Public  property  expended  in  the  military 
service  will  be  accounted   for  by  the 
certificate    of    the    accountable    officer. 
These   certificates   will  accompany  the 


return  covering  the  period  in  which  the 
expenditure  occurred.     (683) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  with  respect  to  clear- 
ing property  returns  of  property  lost  or 
damaged  by  a  soldier  who  has  been  tried 
and  convicted  of  the  offense? 

A.  When  an  enlisted  man  has,  by  a  court- 
martial,  been  convicted  of  losing  or 
damaging  public  property,  the  officer  ac- 
countable for  the  property  will  send  with 
his  property  return  a  certified  copy  of 
so  much  of  the  court-martial  order  as 
refers  to  the  case,  giving  number,  date 
and  place  of  issue  of  the  order,  and 
stating  on  the  face  of  said  copy  the  rolls 
on  which  the  charges  were  made.    (685) 

Q.  What  happens  when  an  officer  fails  to 
render  returns  for  property  for  which 
he  is  accountable? 

A.  Should  an  officer  charged  with  public 
property  fail  to  render  the  returns  pre- 
scribed therefor  within  a  reasonable 
time,  a  settlement  of  his  accounts  will 
be  made  by  the  proper  bureau  of  the 
War  Department,  and  the  money  value 
of  the  property  with  which  he  is  charged 
will  be  reported  against  him  for  stop- 
page.    (700) 

Q.  What  administrative  action  is  taken  with 
respect  to  returns  for  property  when 
they  are  received  in  the  office  of  the 
Chief  of  the  bureau  to  which  they  per- 
tain? 

A.  1.  As  soon  as  practicable  after  the  receipt 
of  a  return  it  will  be  examined  and  the 
officer  making  the  return  will  be  noti- 
fied of  all  errors  and  irregularities  found 
therein  ajid  granted  three  months  to  cor- 
rect them. 

2.  Suspensions  or  disallowances  will  not 
be  made  on  account  of  slight  informali- 
ties which  do  not  affect  the  validity  of  a 
voucher,  but  the  officer's  attention  may 
be  called  to  them. 

3.  Whenever  the  errors  have  been  cor- 
rected or  compensation  has  been  made 
for  the  deficiencies,  and  the  action 
of  the  bureau  chief  is  sustained  or  modi- 
fied by  the  Secretary  of  War,  the  return 
will  be  regarded  as  settled,  and  the  of- 
ficer who  rendered  it  will  be  notified 
accordingly.     (702) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  with  respect  to  pub- 
lic property  which  has  been  damaged 


Night   Operations 


27 


by  causes  other  than  fair  wear  and  tear 
or  is  unsuited  for  the  service? 

A.  Before  being  submitted  to  an  inspector 
for  condemnation  it  will  be  surveyed  by 
a  disinterested  officer.     (710) 

Q.  What  action  should  be  included  in  the  in- 
vestigation of  a  surveying  officer? 

A.  1,  The  surveying  officer  must  fully  in- 
vestigate matters  submitted  to  him. 

2.  He  will  call  for  all 'evidence  obtainable 
and  will  not  limit  his  inquiries  to  proofs 
or  statements  presented  by  parties  at 
interest. 

3.  He  will  rigidly  scrutinize  the  evidence, 
especially  in  cases  of  alleged  theft  or 
embezzlement,  and  will  not  recommend 
the  relief  of  officers  or  soldiers  from 
responsibility  unless  fully  satisfied  that 
those  charged  with  the  care  of  property 
have  performed  their  whole  duty  in  re- 
gard to  it. 

4.  He  should  hear,  in  person  or  by  deposi- 
tion, all  persons  concerned  in  the  sub- 
ject matter  before  him.     (711  and  712) 

Q.  Within  what  period  of  time  must  an  of- 
Acer  call  for  a  survey  on  property  which 
he  finds  unserviceable? 

A.  Within  thirty  days,  unless  exceptional  cir- 
cumstances prevent  such  action.    (713) 

Q.  What  is  the  scope  of  the  duties  that  a 
survey  officer  may  be  called  upon  to  per- 
form? 

A.  1.  He  will  ascertain  and  report  facts,  sub- 
mitting opinions  and  making  recom- 
mendations upon  questions  of  responsi- 
bility which  may  arise  through  acci- 
dent, mistake  or  neglect. 

2.  He  investigates  and  determines  ques- 
tions involving  the  character,  amount 
and  cause  of  damage  or  deficiency  which 
public  property  may  have  sustained  in 
transit,  store  or  use,  and  which  is  not 
the  result  of  ordinary  wear  and  tear  in 
the  service,  and  reports  the  investiga- 
tion made,  his  opinions  thereon,  and 
fixes  the  responsibility  for  such  damage 
or  deficiency  on  the  proper  party. 

3.  He  makes  inventories  of  property 
ordered  abandoned  when  the  articles 
have  not  been  enumerated  in  the  order 
for  abandonment. 

4.  He  recommends  the  prices  at  which 
damaged  clothing  may  be  issued  and  the 
proportion  in  which  supplies  shall  be 
issued  in  consequence  of  damage  or  de- 


terioration that  renders  them,  at  the 
usual  rate,  unequal  to  the  regulation  al- 
lowance, fixing  in  each  instance  the  re- 
sponsibility for  actual  condition. 
5.  He  verifies  the  discrepancy  between  in- 
voices and  actual  quantity  or  descrip- 
tion of  property  transferred  from  one 
officer  to  another,  fixes  definitely 
amounts  for  which  the  receiving  offi- 
cer must  receipt,  and  ascertains,  as  far 
as  possible,  when  and  how  the  discrep- 
ancy has  occurred.     (715) 

Q.  What  classes  of  property  may  be  de- 
stroyed on  the  approved  finding  and 
recommendation  of  a  surveying  officer? 

A.  1.  Clothing  infected  with  contagious  dis- 
ease. 

2.  Stores  that  have  become  so  deteriorated 
as  to  endanger  health  or  injure  other 
stores. 

3.  Unserviceable  property  of  no  salable 
value.  (The  decision  of  the  command- 
ing officer  will  be  final  as  to  whether 
such  property  has  salable  value.) 

Note. — When  the  application  of  this  regu- 
lation to  ordnance  stores  brings  the  total  for 
a  quarter  for  any  organization,  in  excess  of 
the  amounts  hereafter  given,  the  approval  of 
the  next  higher  administrative  commander, 
shall  first  be  obtained. 

Cavalry    troops,    and    engineer    and 

signal  companies,  $300.00. 
Batteries  of  field  artillery,  $500.00. 
Companies  of  infantry  and  coast  ar- 
tillery and  all  other  cases  $150.00. 
(717) 
Q.  To  what  extent  are  approved  survey  re- 
ports considered  as  vouchers  to  prop- 
erty returns? 
A.  They  are  not  to  be  considered  as  conclu- 
sive until  accepted  by  the  Secretary  of 
War.     Until   then,   they   are   regarded 
simply  as  the  opinions  and  recommenda- 
tions of  disinterested  officers,  to  aid  in 
the  settlement  of  questions  of  accounta- 
bility between  the  Government  and  the 
individuals  concerned.    If,  on  examina- 
tion in  the  proper  bureau,  they  exhibit 
serious  errors,  or  defects,  either  of  in- 
vestigation or  of  finding,  they  will  not 
be  accepted  as  sufficient  vouchers,  and 
the  officer  submitting  them  will  be  duly 
notified,   so   that  he   may  have  oppor- 
tunity to  make  explanation  or  appeal  to 
the  Secretary  of  War.    (722) 


28 


Night   Operations 


Q.  What  administrative  action  is  taken  when 
a  surveying  officer  recommends  stop- 
page against  an  enlisted  man? 

A.  The  appointing  authority  will  cause  a 
copy  of  the  report  of  the  survey  to  be 
furnished  to  the  company  commander, 
who  will  charge  the  amount  on  the  next 
pay-roll  of  the  company.     (724) 

Q.  When  an  inspection  of  property  follows  a 
survey  of  it,  what  disposition  is  made  of 
the  survey  report? 

A.  One  copy  of  the  proceedings  will  accom- 
pany the  Inventory  and  Inspection  Re- 
port which  is  transmitted  for  approval, 
and  will  afterwards  be  returned  to  be 
used  as  a  voucher  to  the  officer's  re- 


turns, and  another,  with  the  Inventory 
and  Inspection  Report,  will  be  filed  by 
the  officer  with  his  retained  papers. 
(725) 

Q.  What  are  the  general  rules  regarding  of- 
ficial correspondence  in  the  Army? 

A.  1,  An  official  letter  should  refer  to  one 
subject  only. 

2.  Letters  of  transmittal  will  be  used  only 
when  necessary,  and  when  used  must 
refer  only  to  the  matter  transmitted. 
None  are  required  with  rolls,  returns, 
estimates,  requisitions  or  periodical  re- 
ports. 

3.  The  following  is  the  form  of  official 
correspondence  in  use  in  the  service. 


427 — Broadway, 
New  York  City,  N.  Y.,  October  20,  1916. 
From :  John  Doe. 

To:   The  Commanding  General,  Eastern  Department,  Governor's  Island,  N.  Y. 
Subject:   Examination  for  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

1.  Information  is  requested  as  to  the  date  on  which,  and  the  place  at  which,  the  under- 
signed may  appear  for  examination  for  appointment  as  Second  Lieutenant  of  Infantry  in  the 
Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

John   Doe. 
1st    Ind. 

Hq.  Eastern  Department,  Governor's  Island,  N.  Y.,  October  22,  1916.— To  Mr.  John  Doe,  427 
Broadway,  New  York  City,  N.  Y. 

1.  You  are  authorized  to  appear  before  the  examining  board  at  Governor's  Island,  New 
York,  at  10.00  o'clock  a.m.,  November  17,  1916. 

2.  There  is  inclosed  herewith  a  letter  authorizing  you  to  take  the  examination  for  ap- 
pointment to  the  grade  of  Second  Lieutenant  of  Infantry  in  the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps. 

By  command  of 


1  Incl. 

4.  The  post  office  address  of  an  officer's 
station  will  be  given  in  official  letters. 
Indefinite  expressions  of  locality,  which 
do  not  indicate  where  the  letter  was 
written,  will  not  be  used. 

5.  Official  communications  will  be  signed 
or  authenticated  with  a  pen  and  not  by 
facsimiles,  and  if  written  by  order,  it 
will  be  stated  by  whose  order. 

6.  Signatures  will  be  plainly  and  legibly 
written. 

7.  An  officer  will  not  be  addressed  or 
designated  in  official  communications  by 
any  other  title  than  that  of  his  actual 
rank. 

8.  Communications  from  a  subordinate  to 
a  superior  and  vice  versa  will  pass 
through  intermediate  commanders. 
(775-790— Ed.) 

Q.  When  are  muster  rolls  prepared? 

A.  At  each  bimonthly  muster,  on  the  last  day 


Adjutant. 

of  the  months  of  February,  April,  June, 
August,  October  and  December.    (807) 

Q.  What  disposition  is  made  of  muster  rolls? 

A.  One  copy  is  forwarded  by  the  mustering 

officer  to  the  Adjutant  General  of  the 

Army  and  the  other   copy   is  kept  on 

file  with   the  organization   to   which  it 

•   pertains.     (807) 

Q.  Into  what  parts  is  the  soldier's  clothing 
allowance  divided? 

A.  The  initial  allowance  which  is  intended 
to  cover  the  cost  of  all  clothing  re- 
quired between  the  date  of  enlistment 
and  the  date  upon  which  the  recruit  is 
taken  up  for  full  duty  with  his  company. 
The  initial  allowance  is  not  considered 
fully  earned  by  the  soldier  until  he  has 
completed  six  months'  service. 
The  yearly  allowance  which  is  divided  for 
the  purpose  of  settlement  into  semi-an- 
nual, monthly  and  daily  allowances. — Ed. 


Night   Operations 


29 


Q.  How  often  is  the  soldier's  clothing  allow- 
ance settled? 

A.  On  June  30th  and  December  31st  of  each 
year.  When  the  clothing  account  of  the 
soldier  is  opened  in  the  organization  to 
which  he  has  been  regularly  assigned, 
he  is  credited  with  the  initial  allow- 
ance. At  the  first  settlement  he  is 
credited  with  the  portion  of  the 
yearly  allowance  accruing  between  the 
date  of  enlistment  and  the  date  of  set- 
tlement as  determined  by  the  monthly 
and  daily  rates.  At  each  succeeding 
settlement  he  is  credited  with  the 
half  yearly  allowance,  and  at  the  ex- 
piration of  his  term  of  service  he 
is  credited  with  the  amount  due  from 
the  last  settlement  as  determined  by  the 
monthly  and  daily  rates.  The  clothing 
allowance  of  the  soldier  is  based  upon 
the  estimated  cost  of  the  clothing  neces- 
sary to  equip  him  properly.  The  amount 
changes  from  time  to  time  and  is  pub- 
lished in  orders  from  the  War  Depart- 
ment.    (1161) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  the  soldier  is 
separated  from  the  service  before  the 
completion  of  six  months'  service  and 
before  he  has  fully  earned  his  initial 
clothing  allowance? 

A.  His  clothing  allowance  is  computed  as  fol- 
lows : 

1.  Any  clothing  allowance  that  has  been 
previously  credited  will  be  disregarded. 

2.  The  initial  allowance  will  be  credited 
at  the  daily  rate  from  date  of  enlist- 
ment to  date  of  separation  from  the  ser- 
vice. 

3.  The  yearly  allowance  will  be  similarly 
credited. 

4.  The  sum  of  the  computed  initial  al- 
lowance and  yearly  allowance  will  be 
the  total  allowance  to  be  credited  to 
the  soldier.     (1162) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  a  soldier  has 
a  balance  due  him  on  his  clothing  al- 
lowance at  any  settlement  date? 

A.  He  is  credited  with  the  amount  on  his 
clothing  account.     (Ed.) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  a  soldier  has 
overdrawn  his  clothing  allowance  on 
any  settlement  date? 

A,  The  money  value  of  the  clothing  over- 
drawn is  charged  against  him  and  col- 
lected on  the  pay  rolls.     (Ed.) 

Q.  Describe  the  method  by  which  the  soldier 


procures  clothing  from  the  government 
and  the  administrative  action  taken  to 
account  for  same? 

A.  The  soldier  makes  out  a  list  of  the  cloth- 
ing that  he  desires  to  draw. 
The  company  commander  enters  the 
articles  on  an  individual  clothing  slip, 
showing  the  name  and  rank  of  the  sol- 
.  dier  and  signs  the  same  as  a  request  to 
the  quartermaster  to  issue  the  clothing. 
The  soldier  presents  this  slip,  in  dupli- 
cate to  the  quartermaster,  receives  the 
articles  enumerated  thereon  and  signs 
as  having  received  them  at  the  bottom 
of  the  slip.  The  original  of  the  slip  is 
retained  by  the  quartermaster  and  the 
duplicate  is  returned  to  the  company 
commander  who  makes  a  calculation  of 
the  money  value  of  the  clothing  drawn, 
enters  the  transaction  on  his  abstract 
of  clothing  drawn  and  on  his  statement 
of  clothing  charged  to  enlisted  men, 
and  charges  the  amount  of  the  issue 
against  the  soldier's  clothing  account 
on  his  Descriptive  List.  At  the  end  of 
the  month  or  whenever  an  organization 
leaves  the  vicinity  of  the  issuing  quar- 
termaster for  an  extended  period,  the 
organization  commander  will  compare 
his  abstract  of  clothing  drawn  with  the 
quartermaster's  abstract  of  clothing 
issued.  After  satisfactory  settlement 
of  all  differences,  should  there  be  any, 
an  additional  copy  of  the  abstract  will 
be  prepared  by  the  company  commander 
and  delivered  to  the  quartermaster.  The 
company  commander  will  file  his  re- 
tained copy  with  the  duplicate  clothing 
slips  as  vouchers  and  his  statement  of 
clothing  charged  to  enlisted  men. 
(1157) 

Q.  Is  a  soldier  while  absent  without  leave  en- 
titled to  clothing  allowance? 

A.  He  is  not. 

Q.  What  is  a  ration? 

A.  A  ration  is  the  allowance  for  the  sub- 
sistence of  one  person  for  one  day. 
(1202) 

Q.  What  are  the  several  rations  used  in  the 
United  States  Army? 

A.  The  garrison  ration,  intended  for  troops 
in  garrison  and,  in  time  of  peace,  for 
troops  in  maneuver  camps. 
The  travel  ration,  intended  for  troops 
traveling  otherwise  than  by  marching, 
and  separated  from  cooking  facilities. 


30 


Night   Operations 


The  reserve  ration,  carried  by  troops  on 
the  person  of  the  men  and  in  the  trains, 
and  constituting  the  reserve  for  field 
strvice. 

The  field  ration,  is  the  ration  prescribed 
in  orders  by  the  commander  of  the  field 
forces. 

The  Filipino  ration,  for  the  use  of  the 
Philippine  Scouts. 

The  emergency  ration,  intended  for  troops 
in  active  campaign  for  use  on  occasions 
of  emergency.    (1205) 
Q.  What  are  the  several  components  of  the 

Army  ration f 
A.  The  meat  component  (20  ounces),  con- 
sisting of  fresh  beef  or  mutton  or 
bacon,  or  canned  meat,  or  corned  beef 
hash,  or  fish,  dried,  pickled,  or  canned. 
Turkey  is  provided  in  addition  for 
Thanksgiving  Day  and  Christmas. 
Fresh  beef  is  the  basis  of  the  com- 
ponent, all  others  are  substitutive. 

The  flour  component  (eighteen  ounces), 
substitutes :  soft  bread,  hard  bread,  and 
corn  meal. 

The  baking  powder  component,  0.08 
ounces. 

The  vegetable  componxint.  Beans,  2.4 
ounces,  substitutes :  rice  or  hominy,  1.6 
ounces  each.  Potatoes,  20  ounces,  sub- 
stitutes: canned  potatoes,  onions,  to- 
matoes and  any  other  fresh  vegetables 
that  may  be  procured  in  the  market. 

The  fruit  component.  Prunes,  128  oimces, 
substitutes:  dried  apples,  or  peaches  or 
jam. 

The  coffee  component,  1.12  ounces,  sub- 
stitute: tea. 

Sugar  and  milk  component. 

The  condiments.  Vinegar,  salt,  pepper, 
cinnamon. 

The  lard,  butter,  sirup  and  flavoring  ex- 
tract, components.     (1205) 
Q.  In  adjusting  accounts  how  are  the  sev- 
eral rations  valued? 
A.  Garrison  ration,  30  cents ;  Filipino  ration, 
20   cents,   and   travel   ration,   40  cents. 
(1207) 
Q.  Describe   the   method   of  procuring   the 

rations  for  a  company? 
A.  The  company  commander  submits  a  ration 
return  for  the  number  of  men  that  he 
has  to  ration  for  the  period  prescribed 
by  the  commanding  officer.  This  may  be 
ten  days,  or  any  other  number  of  days. 
In  garrison  it  is  usually  for  the  month, 
in  the  field  for  ten  days,  and  in  some 


cases  five  days.  After  receiving  the  ap- 
proval of  the  commanding  officer  the 
return  is  taken  to  the  quartermaster 
who  calculates  the  total  money  value  of 
the  rations  called  for  and  credits  the 
company  with  the  amount.  The  com- 
pany commander  draws  against  this 
amount  to  its  full  value  if  he  so  desires. 
Any  saving  that  he  may  make  is  paid 
to  him  in  cash  ^t  the  end  of  the  ration 
period  and  any  overdraft  that  he  may 
make  has  to  be  paid  out  of  the  company 
or  other  funds. 
Q.  What  are  the  regulations  regarding  sol- 
diers' deposits? 
A.  An  enlisted  man,  not  on  the  retired  list, 
may  deposit  his  savings  with  any  quar- 
termaster in  sums  of  not  less  than 
$5.00,  the  same  to  remain  so  deposited 
until  final  payment  on  discharge  or  until 
furloughed  to  the  reserve. 

The  quartermaster  furnishes  each  de- 
positor a  book  showing  the  name  of  the 
depositor.  The  date,  place  and  amount, 
in  words  and  figures  of  each  deposit 
made,  will  be  entered  in  the  form  of  a 
certificate  and  signed  by  the  company 
commander  and  quartermaster. 

The  transfer,  pledge,  or  sale  of  the  de- 
posit book  is  prohibited. 

The  company  commander  keeps  a  record 
of  each  deposit  made  by  the  soldier  on 
his  Descriptive  list  and  after  each  pay- 
ment he  forwards,  direct  to  the  Quar- 
termaster General,  a  list  of  the  names 
of  the  depositors  showing  in  each  case 
the  date,  place  and  amount  of  the  de- 
posit and  the  name  of  the  Quartermaster 
who  received  it. 

A  list  of  the  soldier's  deposits  will  be  made 
on  his  final  statements  when  he  is  dis- 
charged or  furloughed  to  the  reserve 
and  they  will  be  paid  to  him  together 
with  interest  at  the  rate  of  four  per 
cent  for  all  sums  that  have  remained 
on  deposit  more  than  six  months. 

Deposits  and  the  interest  thereon  are  for- 
feited by  desertion,  but  forfeiture  of 
them  cannot  be  imposed  by  sentence  of 
court-martial. 

They  are  exempt  from  liability  for  debts 
due  to  individuals;  from  forfeiture  by 
the  sentence  of  a  court-martial ;  and 
from  payment  of  the  soldier's  private 
debts.  They  are  not  exempt  from  lia- 
bility for  debts  due  the  United  States. 
(Ed.) 


Military  Law 


Q.  What  are  the  four  classes  of  Military 
Jurisdiction? 

A.  1.  Military  Government  (the  law  of  hos- 
tile occupation). 

2.  Martial  Law  at  home  (a  domestic  fact). 

3.  Martial  Law  applied  to  the  Army. 

4.  Military  Law. 

Q.  What  is  Military  Government,  or  the  law 
of  hostile  occupation? 

A.  Military  power  exercised  by  a  belligerent 
by  virtue  of  his  occupation  of  an 
enemy's  territory.  This  belongs  to  the 
Law  of  War  and,  therefore,  to  the 
Law  of  Nations.  When  a  conquered 
territory  is  ceded  to  the  conqueror, 
military  government  continues  until 
civil  government  is  established  by  the 
new  sovereign. 

Q.  What  is  Martial  Law  at  home? 

A.  Military  power  exercised  in  time  of  war, 
insurrection  or  rebellion,  in  parts  of 
the  country  retaining  their  allegiance, 
and  over  persons  and  things  not  ordi- 
narily subjected  to  it. 

Q.  What  is  the  Martial  Law  Applied  to  the 
A  rmy  ? 

A.  The  military  power  extending  in  time  of 
war,  insurrection  or  rebellion,  over  per- 
sons in  the  military  service,  as  to  obli- 
gations arising  out  of  such  emergency 
and  not  falling  within  the  domain  of 
military  law,  or  otherwise  regulated  by 
law. 

Q.  What  is  Military  Law? 

A.  The  legal  system  that  regulates  the  gov- 
ernment of  the  military  establishment. 
It  is  a  branch  of  the  municipal  law, 
and  in  the  United  States  derives  its  ex- 
istence from  special  constitutional 
grants  of  power. 

Q.  What  is  the  source  of  military  jurisdic- 
tion in  the  United  States? 

A.  The  Constitution. 


Q.  From  what  sources  is  Military  Law  de- 
rived? 

A.  It  is  derived  from  both  written  and  un- 
written sources. 

Q.  What  are  the  written  sources  of  Military 
Law? 

A.  The  Articles  of  War,  enacted  by  Con- 
gress, August  29,  1916. 

2.  Statutory  enactments  relating  to  the 
military  service. 

3.  The  Army  Regulations. 

4.  The  General  and  Special  Orders,  and 
decisions  promulgated  by  the  War  De- 
partment and  by  department,  post  and 
other  commanders. 

Q.  What  is  the  source  of  the  unwritten  mili- 
tary law? 

A.  The  custom  of  war,  consisting  of  the 
customs  of  the  service  both  in  peace  and 
war. 

Q.  What  are  the  three  kinds  of  Military 
Tribunals? 

A.  1.  Military  Commissions  and  Provost 
Courts,  for  the  trial  of  offenders 
against  the  laws  of  war  and  under 
Martial  Law. 

2.  Courts-Martial — General,  Special  and 
Summary — for  the  trial  of  offenders 
against  military  law. 

3.  Courts  of  Inquiry,  for  the  examina- 
tion of  transactions  of,  or  accusations 
or  imputations  against,  officers  and 
soldiers. 

Q.  What  persons  are  subject  to  Military  Law? 

A.  1.  All  officers  and  soldiers  belonging  to 
the  regular  army  of  the  Uited  States ; 
all  volunteers,  from  the  dates  of  their 
muster  or  acceptance  into  the  military 
service  of  the  United  States;  and  all 
other  persons  lawfully  called,  drafted, 
or  ordered  into,  or  to  duty,  or  for 
training  in  the  said  service,  from  the 
dates  they  are   required  by  the  terms 

31 


Night  Operations 


of  the  call,  draft,  or  order  to  obey  the 
same. 

2.  Cadets. 

3.  Officers  and  soldiers  of  the  Marine 
Corps,  when  detached  for  service  with 
the  armies  of  the  United  States,  by 
order  of  the  President. 

4.  Officers  and  men  of  the  Medical  De- 
partment of  the  Navy,  serving  with  a 
body  of  Marines  detached  for  service 
with  the  Army,  in  the  same  marmer  as 
officers  and  men  of  the  Marine  Corps 
who  may  be  so  serving. 

5.  All  retainers  to  the  camp  and  all  per- 
sons accompanying  or  serving  with  the 
armies  of  the  United  States,  outside  of 
the  territorial  jurisdiction  of  the  United 
States;  and,  in  time  of  war,  all  such 
retainers  and  persons  accompanying  or 
serving  with  the  armies  of  the  United 
States  in  the  field,  both  within  and 
without  the  territorial  jurisdiction  of 
the  United  States,  though  not  other- 
wise subject  to  the  Articles  of  War. 

6.  All  persons  under  sentence  adjudged 
by  courts-martial. 

7.  Army  field  clerks. 

8.  Field  Clerks,  Quartermaster  Corps. 

Q.  What  are  the  several  kinds  of  courts-mar- 
tial in  the  United  States  service? 
A.  1.  The  General  court-martial. 

2.  The  Special  court-martial. 

3.  The  Summary  court-martial. 

Q.  Who  may  he  detailed  as  members  of  a 
court-martial? 

A.  All  officers  in  the  military  service  of  the 
United  States  and  officers  of  the  Marine 
Corps  when  detached  for  service  with 
the  Army  by  order  of  the  President. 

Q.  What  are  the  exceptions? 

A.  1.  No  officer  may  sit  as  a  member  of  a 
general  or  special  court-martial  when 
he  is  the  accuser  or  a  witness  for  the 
prosecution. 
2.  Chaplains,  veterinarians,  dental  sur- 
geons, and  second  lieutenants  in  the 
Quartermaster  Corps  are  not  in  prac- 
tice detailed  as  members  of  courts- 
martial. 

Q.  What  is  the  composition  of  a  general 
court-martial? 

A.  It  may  consist  of  any  number  of  officers 
from  5  to  13,  inclusive. 

Q.  What  is  the  minimum  number  that  may 
continue  to  transact  business? 


A.  Five.  While  a  number  less  than  five  can- 
not be  organized  as  a  general  court- 
martial  or  proceed  with  a  trial,  they 
may  perform  such  acts  as  are  prelimi- 
nary to  the  organization  and  action  of 
the  court. 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  the  court  is 
reduced  below  five? 

A.  It  will  direct  the  judge  advocate  to  re- 
port the  facts  to  the  convening  author- 
ity, and  await  his  orders. 

Q.  What  is  the  composition  of  a  special 
court-martial? 

A.  It  consists  of  any  number  of  officers  from 
three  to  five,  inclusive.  When  the  mem- 
bers are  reduced  below  three,  a  report 
of  the  fact  will  be  made  by  the  judge 
advocate  to  the  convening  authority, 
who  will  detail  enough  officers  to  en- 
able the  court  to  proceed. 

Q.  What  is  the  composition  of  a  summary 
court-martial? 

A.  It  consists  of  one  officer. 

Q.  Under  what  conditions  may  retired  of- 
ficers of  the  Army  be  detailed  as  mem- 
bers of  courts-martial? 

A.  1.  When,  in  time  of  peace,  they  are  as- 
signed to  active  duty  with  their  own 
consent. 

2.  When,  in  time  of  war,  they  are  em- 
ployed on  active  duty  in  the  discretion 
of  the  President. 

3.  At  other  times  they  are  not  available 
for  court-martial  duty. 

Q.  Under  what  conditions  are  members  of 
the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps  azmilable 
for  court-martial  duty? 

A.  When  they  are  ordered  to  active  service 
by  the  Secretary  of  War. 

Q.  Under  what  circumstance  may  officers  of 
the  Regular  Army  and  officers  of  the 
Marine  Corps  serve  on  courts-martial 
together? 

A.  When  troops  of  the  Marine  Corps  are 
detached,  by  order  of  the  President, 
for  service  with  the  Army. 

Q.  Is  there  any  distinction  between  officers 
of  the  regular  service  and  other  of- 
ficers with  reference  to  their  eligibility 
for  duty  as  members  of  a  court-mar- 
tial? 

A.  No  distinction  now  exists  for  the  trial 
of  any  person  subject  to  military  law 
in  the  matter  of  eligibility  for  court- 
martial  duty  among  the  various  classes 


Night   Operations 


SS 


of   officers   in   the   military   service  of 
the  United  States. 

Q.  May  an  oMcer  be  tried  by  ofUcers  junior 
to  him  in  rank? 

A.  In  no  case,  when  it  can  be  avoided,  shall 
an  officer  be  tried  by  officers  junior  to 
him  in  rank.  This  provision  is  not 
mandatory  upon  the  convening  author- 
ity. Its  effect  is  to  leave  to  that  of- 
ficer— as  the  final  authority  to  judge — , 
the  determination  of  rank  of  the  mem- 
bers, with  only  the  general  instruction 
that  seniors  in  rank  to  the  accused  shall 
be  selected,  as  far  as  the  exigencies 
and  interests  of  the  service  will  permit. 

Q.  What  officers  are  empowered  to  appoint 
general  courts-martial? 

A.  1.  The  President  of  the  United  States. 

2.  The  commanding  officer  of  a  terri- 
torial division. 

3.  The  commanding  officer  of  a  terri- 
torial department. 

4.  The  Superintendent  of  the  Military 
Academy. 

5.  The  commanding  officer  of  an  army. 

6.  The  commanding  officer  of  an  army 
corps. 

7.  The  commanding  officer  of  a  tactical 
division. 

8.  The  commanding  officer  of  a  separate 
brigade. 

9.  The  commanding  officer  of  any  dis- 
trict or  any  force  or  body  of  troops, 
when  empowered  by  the  President  to 
do  so. 

Q.  When  the  person  having  the  authority  to 
appoint  a  court-martial  is  the  accuser, 
what  action  is  taken? 

A.  The  court  is  appointed  by  a  higher  com- 
petent authority. 

Q.  May  officers  be  tried  before  courts-mar- 
tial appointed  by  the  Superintendent  of 
the  Military  Academy? 

A.  They  may  not. 

Q.  Under  what  authority  may  the  Presi- 
dent institute  a  general  court-martial? 

A.  1.  As  commander-in-chief  of  the  Army. 

2.  When  the  accuser  is  the  superior  of- 
ficer of  the  army,  and  the  law  requires 
the  next  higher  commander  to  appoint 
the  court. 

3.  In  the  particular  cases  provided  in  1230 
of  the  Revised  Statutes. 

Note. — When  an  officer,  dismissed  by  order 
of  the   President,  makes  a  written  applica- 


tion for  trial,  setting  forth  under  oath  that 
he  has  been  wrongfully  dismissed,  the  Presi- 
dent shall,  as  soon  as  the  necessities  of  the 
service  may  permit,  convene  a  court-martial 
to  try  such  officer  on  the  charges  on  which 
he  shall  havd  been  dismissed.  And,  if  a 
court-martial  is  not  so  convened  within  six 
months  from  the  presentation  of  such  appli- 
cation for  trial,  or  if  such  court,  being  con- 
vened, does  not  award  dismissal  or  death  as 
the  punishment  of  such  officer,  the  order  of 
dismissal  by  the  President  shall  be  void. 
(R.  S.  1230.) 

Q.  What  authority  has  the  appointing  of- 
ficer over  a  court-martial? 
A.  He  may  control  its  existence,  dissolve  it 
and  determine  the  cases  to  be  referred 
to  it  for  trial,  but  he  can  not  control 
the  court  in  the  exercise  of  powers 
vested  in  it  by  law. 
Q.  What  authorities  may  appoint  a  special 

court-martial? 
A.  1.  The  commanding  officer  of  a  district. 

2.  Tlie  commanding  officer  of  a  garrison. 

3.  The  commanding  officer  of  a  fort 

4.  The  commanding  officer  of  a  camp. 

5.  The  commanding  officer  of  any  place 
where  troops  are  on  duty. 

6.  The  commanding  officer  of  a  brigade. 

7.  The  commanding  officer  of  a  regiment. 

8.  The  commanding  officer  of  a  detached 
battalion. 

9.  The    commanding   officer   of    any    de- 
tached command. 

Q.  May  a  commanding  officer  appoint  him- 
self as  a  member  of  a  special  court- 
martial? 

A.  He  may  not. 

Q.  What  authorities  may  appoint  a  sum^- 
mary  court? 

A.  Any  commanding  officer. 

Q.  When  there  is  only  one  officer  on  duty 
with  a  command  what  action  is  taken 
with  reference  to  the  appointment  of  a 
summary    court    officer? 

A.  When  but  one  officer  is  present  with  a 
command,  he  is  the  summary  court  of- 
ficer of  that  command  and  shall  hear 
and  determine  cases  brought  before 
him.  In  such  case  no  order  appointing 
the  court  will  be  issued,  but  the  officer 
will  enter  on  the  record  that  he  is  "  the 
only  officer  present  with  the  command." 

Q.  Who  has  power  to  appoint  the  judge  ad- 
vocate of  a  court-martial? 


S4 


Night  Operations 


A.  The  officer  empowered  to  appoint  the 
court 

Q.  From  what  ultimate  source  does  the  court- 
martial  derive  its  existence? 

A.  From  Congress. 

Q.  To  what  class  of  cases  is  the  jurisdiction 
of  the  court-martial  limited, 

A.  Its  jurisdiction  is  limited  to  criminal 
cases. 

Q.  Are  the  decisions  of  courts-martial  sub- 
ject to  review? 

A.  They  are  not  subject  to  review  by  any 
courts  whatsoever.  The  United  States 
Courts  may,  on  writ  of  habeas  corpus, 
inquire  into  the  legality  of  the  deten- 
tion of  a  person  held  by  military 
authority.  Such  inquiry  may  be  made 
at  any  time,  either  before  or  during 
trial,  or  while  sentence  is  being  served, 
and  the  court  will  order  such  person 
discharged  if  it  appears  to  the  satis- 
faction of  the  court  that  any  of 
the  statutory  requirements  conferring 
jurisdiction  have  not  been  fulfilled. 

Q.  What  action  is  necessary  to  legalize  the 
action  of  a  court-martial? 

A.  The  approval,  or  confirmation,  of  the 
proper  commanding  officer.  With  such 
approval  or  confirmation,  sentences  of 
courts-martial  become  operative,  are  as 
effective  as  the  sentences  of  civil  courts 
having  criminal  jurisdiction,  and  are 
entitled  to  the  same  legal  considera- 
tion. 

Q.  What  conditions  must  obtain  as  to  the 
legal  jurisdiction  of  a  court-martial 
and  the  validity  of  its  judgments? 

A.  It  must  be  shown: 

1.  That  it  was  convened  by  an  officer  em- 
powered by  statute  to  convene  it. 

2.  That  the  persons  who  sat  on  the  court 
were  legally  competent  to  do  so. 

3.  That  the  court  thus  constituted  was  in- 
vested by  the  acts  of  Congress  with  the 
power  to  try  the  person  and  the  offense 
charged. 

4.  That  its  sentence  was  in  accordance 
with  the  law. 

Q.  What  is  the  rule  of  procedure  when 
courts-martial  and  civil  courts  have 
concurrent  jurisdiction? 

A.  In  accordance  with  the  principle  of 
comity,  as  between  the  military  and 
civil  tribunals,  in  cases  of  concurrent 
jurisdiction    the   court   which   first   at- 


taches in  a  particular  case  is  entitled 
to  proceed  to  its  termination. 

Q,  What  is  the  procedure  when  a  court-mar- 
tial has  duly  assumed  jurisdiction  over 
an  offence  and  over  the  person  com- 
mitting it,  and  is  divested  of  that  juris- 
diction by  a  wrongful  act  of  the  ac- 
cused? 

A.  A  court-martial  having  once  assumed 
jurisdiction  of  a  case,  can  not  be  di- 
vested, by  any  wrongful  act  of  the  ac- 
cused, of  its  authority  or  be  discharged 
from  its  duty  to  proceed  to  fully  try 
and  determine  according  to  law  and  its 
oath.  Thus,  the  fact  that  the  accused, 
after  arraignment  and  during  the  trial, 
has  escaped  from  military  custody  fur- 
nishes no  ground  for  not  proceeding 
to  a  finding  and,  in  the  event  of  con- 
viction;, to  a  sentence  in  the  case;  the 
court  may  and  should  find  and  sentence 
as  in  any  other  case. 

Q.  What  are  the  exceptions  to  the  rule  that 
military  jurisdiction  terminates  when  a 
person  is  legally  separated  from  the 
service? 

A.  1.  Persons  guilty  of  fraud  against  the 
United  States. 

2.  Under   Section    1230   Revised    Statutes 
(see  ante.), 

3.  Persons  serving  sentence  of  a  court- 
martial. 

4.  Where  a  discharge  is  secured  by  fraud. 

5.  Desertion  in  previous  enlistment. 
Note. — For  an  offence  committed  prior  to 

the  expiration  of  his  term  of  enlistment,  a 
soldier  may  be  held  in  the  service  and  tried 
after  the  expiration  of  his  term.  So,  also,  a 
soldier  may  be  tried  for  offences  committed 
while  making  up  time  lost  by  desertion ; 
through  absence  without  leave ;  through  dis- 
ease or  injury,  the  result  of  his  own  mis- 
conduct. 

Q.  Over  what  persons  and  offences  do  gen- 
eral courts-martial  have  jurisdiction? 
A.  1.  Any    person    subject   to    military    law; 
for  any  crime  or  offence  made  punish- 
able by  the  Articles  of  War. 
2.  Any  person  other  than  (1)  above,  who 
by  the  law  of  war  is  subject  to  trial  by 
military   tribunals ;    for    any   crime   or 
offence  in  violation  of  the  law  of  war. 
Q.  What  limits  are  placed  on  the  punishing 
power  of  a  general  court-martial? 


Night  Operations 


35 


A.  Punishment  is  discretionary  with  a  gen- 
eral court-martial  except: 

(o)   When  mandatory  under  the  law. 

(b)  When   limited   by  order  of  the 

President,  under  the  45th  Arti- 
cle of  War. 

(c)  That  the  death  penalty  can  be 

imposed,  only  when  specifically 

authorized. 
Q.  Name  some  of  the  mandatory  sentences? 
A.  1.  The   death    sentence   is   mandatory   in 
the  case  of  spies. 

2.  Dismissal  is  mandatory  for  conduct  un- 
becoming an  officer  and  a  gentleman. 

3.  Either  death  or  imprisonment  is  man- 
datory for  murder  or  rape. 

Q.  Over  what  persons  and  offences  do  spe- 
cial courts-martial  have  jurisdiction? 
A.  1.  Any  person  subject  to  military  law,  ex- 
cept: 

(a)  An  officer. 

(&)  Any  person  subject  to  military 
law  and  belonging  to  a  class 
or    classes    excepted    by    the 
President. 
2.  Any    crime    or    offence — not    capital — 
made    punishable    by    the    Articles    of 
War. 
Note. — Under    (&),    cadets    and    soldiers 
holding  certificates  of  eligibility  for  promo- 
tion are  excepted   from  the  jurisdiction  of 
special  courts-martial. 
Q.  What  are   the   capital  crimes  under  the 

Articles  of  War? 
A.  1.  Peace  offences: 

(o)   Assaulting  or  disobeying  a  su- 
perior officer. 
(6)  Mutiny  or  sedition, 
(c)  Failure   to    suppress   mutiny   or 
sedition. 
2.  War  offences : 

(a)  Desertion. 

(b)  Advising   or   aiding   another  to 

desert. 

(c)  Misbehavior  before   the  enemy. 

(d)  Subordinates  compelling  a  com- 

mander to  surrender, 

(e)  Improper  use  of  countersign. 
(/)  Forcing  a  safeguard. 

(g)  Relieving,    corresponding    with, 

or  aiding  the  enemy. 
(h)   Spies. 

(»■)  Misbehavior  of  sentinel. 
Q.  What  is  the  limit  of  the  punishing  power 
of  a  special  court-martial? 


A.  1.  Confinement  for  six  months. 
2.  Forfeiture  of  pay  for  six  months. 
Note. — They  can  not  adjudge  dishonorable 
discharge.  Reduction  of  noncommissioned 
officers  to  the  ranks  and  reduction  of  pri- 
vates in  grade  may  be  adjudged  in  addition 
to  the  above. 

Q.  Over  what  persons  and  offences  do  juw- 
mary  courts-martial  have  jurisdiction? 
A.  1.  Any   person   subject   to    military   law, 
except : 

(o)  An  officer. 

(b)  A  cadet. 

(c)  A  soldier  holding  a  certificate  of 

eligibility  for  promotion. 
id)  A  noncommissioned  officer  who 
objects  to  trial.     (Except  when 
ordered   by   an   officer   compe- 
tent to  bring  him  to  trial  be- 
fore a  general  court-martial.) 
(e)  Any  person  belonging  to  a  class 
or  classes  of  persons  excepted 
by    the     President    from    the 
jurisdiction    of    the    summary 
court-martial. 
2.  For   any   crime   or   offence — not   capi- 
tal— made  punishable  by  the  Articles  of 
War. 
Q.  What  are  the  limits  of  punishment  of  a 

summary  court-martial? 
A.  1.  Confinement  for  three  months. 
2.  Forfeiture  of  three  months'  pay. 
Note. — Reduction  to  the  ranks  in  the  case 
of  noncommissioned  officers,  etc.     See  note, 
second  question  above. 
Q.  What  restrictive  action  is  taken  against  an 

officer  charged  with  an  offence? 
A.  An  officer  charged  with  crime  or  a  seri- 
ous offence  against  the  Articles  of  War 
shall  be  placed  in  arrest  by  the  com- 
manding officer,  and,  in  exceptional 
cases,  an  officer  so  charged  may,  by  the 
same  authority,  be  placed  in  confine- 
ment. 
Q.  What  restrictive  action  is  taken  against  a 

soldier  charged  with  an  offence? 
A.  1.  A    soldier    charged   with    crime    or    a 
serious  offence  against  the  Articles  of 
War   shall  be  placed  in   confinement; 
when  charged  with  a  minor  offence,  he 
may  be  placed  in  arrest. 
Note.— In   practice,   the   general    rule   ob- 
served is :  if  a  soldier  is  to  be  tried  by  a  gen- 
eral court-martial,  he  will  be  placed  in  con- 


se 


Night   Operations 


finement;  if  he  is  to  be  tried  by  an  inferior 

court,  he  is  placed  in  arrest. 

Q.  Does  the  fact  that  a  person  charged  with 

an  offence  has  not  been  placed  in  arrest 

or  confinement  affect   the  jurisdiction 

of  the  court  f 
A.  It  does  not. 
Q.  In  whom  is  vested  the  power  of  placing 

officers  in  arrest? 
A.  Only     commanding     officers,    except    as 

provided    for    in   the   68th   Article   of 

War: 

All  officers  and  noncommissioned 
officers  have  power  to  part  and  quell 
all  quarrels,  frays  and  disorders  among 
persons  subject  to  military  law  and  to 
order  officers  who  take  part  in  the  same 
into  arrest,  and  other  persons  subject 
to  military  law  who  take  part  in  the 
same  into  arrest  or  confinement,  as  cir- 
cumstances may  require,  until  their 
proper  superior  officer  is  acquainted 
therewith    .    .    . 

Q.  How  is  the  arrest  of  an  officer  effected? 

A.  He  may  be  placed  in  arrest  by  his  com- 
manding officer  in  person  or  through 
another  officer;  by  a  verbal  or  written 
order  or  communication,  advising  him 
that  he  is  placed  in  arrest,  will  con- 
sider himself  in  arrest,  or  words  to  that 
effect. 

Q.  What  is  the  official  and  social  status  of 
an  officer  in  arrest  f 

A.  1.  He  cannot  exercise  command  of  any 
kind. 

2.  He  will  not  wear  his  sword. 

3.  He  will  not  visit  officially  his  com- 
manding officer  or  other  superior  of- 
ficer unless  directed  to  do  so. 

4.  His  applications  and  requests  of  every 
nature  will  be  made  in  writing. 

Q.  What  is  the  rule  in  regard  to  placing 
medical  officers  in  arrest? 

A.  In  ordinary  cases,  where  inconvenience 
to  the  service  would  result,  a  medical 
officer  will  not  be  placed  in  arrest  un- 
til the  court-martial  convenes  for  his 
trial. 

Q.  What  action  is  necessary  in  placing  a 
soldier  in  confinement? 

A.  Except  as  provided  in  the  A.  W.  68 
(ante),  or  when  restraint  is  neces- 
sary, no  soldier  will  be  confined  with- 
out the  order  of  an  officer,  who  shall 
previously  inquire  into  his  offence.    It 


proper,  however,  for  a  company  com- 
mander to  delegate  to  the  noncommis- 
sioned officers  of  his  company  the 
power  to  place  enlisted  men  in  arrest 
when  restraint  is  necessary,  but  such 
action  must  be  reported  at  once  to  the 
company  commander. 

Q.  What  is  the  status  of  noncommissioned 
officers  in  arrest? 

A.  They  will  not  be  called  upon  to  per- 
form any  duty  in  which  they  may  be 
called  upon  to  exercise  authority  or 
control  over  others.  When  placed  in 
confinement,  they  will  not  be  sent  out 
to  work. 

Q.  Who  vtay  arrest  deserters  from  the  mili- 
tary service? 

A.  Any  civil  officer  having  authority  under 
the  laws  of  the  United  States  or  of 
any  State,  Territory,  district  or  pos- 
session of  the  United  States. 
Any  citizen,  under  an  order  or  by  direc- 
tion of  a  military  officer. 

Q.  What  is  a  military  charge? 

A.  A  military  charge  corresponds  to  a  civil 
indictment.  It  consists  of  two  parts — 
the  technical  charge  and  the  specifica- 
tion. The  former  alleges  the  offence  in 
general  terms,  and  the  latter  sets  forth 
the  facts  constituting  the  same. 

Q.  What  requirement  must  a  charge  fulfil? 

A.  It  must  be  laid  under  the  proper  Arti- 
cle of   War  or  other  statute. 

Q.  What  requirements  must  the  specification 
fulfil? 

A.  It  must  set  forth  in  simple  and  con- 
cise language  facts  sufficient  to  consti- 
tute the  particular  offence ;  and  in  such 
manner  as  to  enable  a  person  of  com- 
mon understanding  to  know  what  is 
intended. 

Q.  Who  may  prefer  charges? 

A.  Any  officer.  This  includes  officers  of  the 
Army  on  the  retiied  list  and  those  of 
the  Officers'  Reserve  Corps  in  active 
service.  An  officer  is  not  disqualified 
by  reason  of  the  fact  that  he  himself 
is  under  charges  or  in  arrest. 

Q.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  the  number- 
ing of  charges  and  specifications? 

A.  Where  there  are  several  specifications 
under  one  Article  of  War  the  usual 
manner  is  to  place  them  all  under  one 
charge,  rather  than  to  make  several 
charges    with    one    specification    under 


Night   Operations 


37 


each.  Where  there  are  several  speci- 
fications under  one  charge  they  will 
be  consecutively  numbered,  and  where 
there  are  several  charges,  the  same  will 
be  consecutively  numbered. 
Q.  To  what  statements  should  a  charge  be 

limited? 
A,  To  a  designation  of  the  Article  of  War 

violated. 
Q.  What  elements  should  a  speciHcatioin  con- 
tain? 
A,  1.  The  name,    rank,   title,   and   organiza- 
tion of  the  accused  person,  if  he  be- 
longs to  the  Army  of  the  United  States, 
should  be  stated.     If  the  accused  is  a 
civilian,  he  should  be  so  described  as 
to  establish  the  fact  that  he  is  subject 
to  trial  by  military  tribunals. 
2.  The     facts     constituting     the     offence 
charged   will  be   set   forth  briefly  but 
clearly,    together    with    the   place    and 
time  of   commission.     Care  should  be 
taken  that  all  the  elements  of  the  of- 
fence  as   described   in   the   Article   of 
War,  or  the  other  statute,  are  set  forth. 
The  specification  must  be  appropriate 
to  the  charge. 
Q.  What  is   the  routine  procedure  in  pre- 
paring and  forwarding  charges  against 
an  enlisted  man? 
A.  All   charges,    for   trial   by   court-martial, 
will  be  prepared  in  triplicate.    The  pre- 
scribed charge-sheet  will  be  used  as  a 
first  sheet,  ordinary  paper  being  used 
for  such  additional  sheets  as  may  be 
necessary. 
They  will  be  accompanied : 

(o)  Except  when  the  trial  is  to  be 
had  by  summary  court,  by  a 
brief  statement  of  the  testi- 
mony expected  from  each  ma- 
terial witness,  both  for  the 
prosecution  and  for  the  de- 
fence, together  with  all  avail- 
able and  necessary  informa- 
tion as  to  any  other  actual  or 
probable  testimony  or  evidence 
in  the  case;  and 
(&)  In  the  case  of  a  soldier,  by 
properly  authenticated  evidence 
of  convictions,  if  any,  during 
the  preceding  year  of  his  cur- 
rent enlistment. 

The  charges  are  forwarded 
by  the  officer  preferring  them 


to  the  officer  exercising  sum- 
mary court-martial  jurisdic- 
tion over  the  command  to 
which  the  accused  belongs  who 
will  refer  them  to  a  court-mar- 
tial in  his  jurisdiction  for  trial, 
or  forward  them  to  the  next 
superior  authority  exercising 
court-martial  jurisdiction  over 
the  command  to  which  the  ac- 
cused belongs  or  pertains. 

(c)  When  trial  is  to  be  had  by  sum- 

mary court,  the  completed 
charges  become  the  record  of 
trial.  A  copy  will  be  com- 
pleted and  sent  to  the  company 
or  other  commander.  A  second 
copy  will  be  completed  and 
forwarded  to  the  officer  exer- 
cising general  court-martial 
jurisdiction  over  the  command. 

(d)  When  trial  is  had  by  special  or 

general      court-martiali,     two 
copies  of  the  charges  will  be 
referred  to  the  trial  judge-ad- 
vocate,   one    copy   to   be    fur- 
nished by  him  to  the  accused. 
The   third   copy   will   be   used 
for  purposes  of  record  in  the 
office  of  the  officer  appointing 
the  court. 
Q.  What  investigation  is  made  before  charges 
for  trial  by  general  court-martial  are 
forwarded? 
A.  The    officer    exercising    summary    court- 
martial  jurisdiction  over  the  command 
to   which   the   accused   pertains    either 
carefully  investigates  the  case  himself 
or  causes  an  officer  other  than  the  of- 
ficer preferring  the  charges  to  investi- 
gate them  carefully  and  report  to  him 
the  result  of  such  investigation.     The 
officer  investigating  the  charges  will  af- 
ford to  the  accused  an  opportunity  to 
make  any  statement,  offer  any  evidence, 
or  present  any  matter  in  extenuation 
that  he  may  desire  to  have  considered 
in     connection     with     the     accusation 
against  him. 
Q.  What  elements  must  be  included  in  the 
endorsement  by  which  charges  are  for- 
warded to  superior  authority? 
A.  1.  The  name  of  the  officer  who  investi- 
gated the  charges. 
2.  The    opinion    of    such    officer    as    to 


38 


Night  Operations 


whether  the  several  charges  can  be  sus- 
tained. 

3.  The  substance  of  the  statement,  if  any, 
that  the  accused  may  voluntarily  make 
in  connection  with  the  case. 

4.  A  summary  of  the  extenuating  circum- 
stances, if  any,  connected  with  the 
case. 

5.  His  recommendation  as  to  the  action 
to  be  taken. 

Q.  What  period  is  allowed  the  accused  to 
prepare  for  his  defence? 

A.  Five  days. 

Q.  What  is  the  procedure  of  a  General 
Court- Martial? 

A.  The  following  is  the  order  of  institution 
and  procedure  of  a  General  Court- 
Martial  : 

1.  The  order  instituting  the  court  is 
issued  from  the  headquarters  of  the 
officer  competent  to  appoint  a  general 
court-martial.  The  body  of  this  order 
designates  the  date,  hour,  and  place 
where  the  court  is  to  meet;  details  the 
members  of  the  court  by  rank,  name, 
and  organization  in  the  order  of  their 
relative  rank;  details  the  judge  advo- 
cate of  the  court  by  his  rank,  name  and 
organization;  and  authorizes  the  ap- 
pointment of  a  stenographic  reporter 
and  the  necessary  travel. 

2.  The  members  of  the  court  assem- 
ble at  the  place  and  hour  designated  in 
the  order  for  the  first  session  of  the 
court.  Thereafter,  they  meet  in  accord- 
ance with  the  adjournment,  which  is 
usually  "  to  meet  at  the  call  of  the  presi- 
dent." When  the  court  is  detailed  to 
try  a  number  of  cases  this  procedure  is 
usually  modified  by  having  the  first 
meeting  on  notice  by  the  president, 
through  the  judge  advocate,  that  there 
is  business  to  be  transacted. 

The  members  of  the  court  wear  the 
uniform  prescribed  by  the  president 
(usually  dress),  and  sabers.  The  judge 
advocate,  the  accused  and  his  counsel 
wear  the  same  uniform  as  the  court, 
without  side  arms.  Military  witnesses 
wear  the  uniform  of  the  court,  with 
side  arms.  When  an  enlisted  man  is 
tried  for  desertion,  he  appears  before 
the  court  in  the  dress  that  he  wore  at 
the  time  of  his  apprehension  or  sur- 
render. 

3.  When  the  court  is  ready  to  pro- 


ceed, the  members  take  seats  at  a  table 
provided  for  the  purpose.  The  presi- 
dent sits  at  the  head  of  the  table.  The 
other  members  at  his  right  and  left, 
alternately,  according  to  relative  rank. 
The  judge  advocate  sits  at  the  foot  of 
the  table  or  at  a  separate  table.  The 
accused  and  his  counsel  sit  at  a  table 
conveniently  placed.  A  witness,  when 
testifying,  is  seated  near  the  judge  ad- 
vocate, and  the  reporter  is  placed  near 
the  witness'  chair.  The  interpreter  is 
located  at  a  convenient  place  (see 
figure). 

4.  After  the  members  of  the  court  are 
seated,  the  judge  advocate  calls  the 
roll,  using  the  order  instituting  the 
court,  after  which  he  announces  the 
result  to  the  president  as :  Sir,  all  ore 
present,  or  so  and  so  is  absent,  stag- 
ing the  cause  or  authority  for  the  ab- 
sence if  it  is  known.  The  president 
directs  the  judge  advocate:  "Proceed 
with  the  business  of  the  court." 

5.  The  judge  advocate  then  causes 
the  accused,  his  counsel,  the  reporter, 
and  interpreter  to  enter  the  court  room 
and,  while  he  and  they  remain  stand- 
ing, announces :  The  judge  advocate  is 
prepared  to  proceed  with  the  case  of  the 
United  States  versus  Private  John  Doe, 
Company  "  K,"  48th  Infantry. 

The  president  announces :  //  there  is 
no  objection,  the  court  will  proceed  to 
the  trial  of  Private  Doe. 

The  judge  advocate  announces:  The 
accused  desires  to  introduce  First  Lieu- 
tenant William  Williams,  4Sth  Infantry, 
as  his  counsel,  or,  in  case  the  accused 
does  not  desire  counsel,  the  judge  ad- 
vocate states :  The  accused  states  that 
he  does  not  desire  counsel. 

6.  The  reporter  of  the  court  is  then 
sworn  by  the  judge  advocate,  admin- 
istering the  following  oath,  both  stand- 
ing: You  swear  (or  affirm)  that  you 
will  faithfully  perform  the  duties  of  re- 
porter to  this  court.    So  help  you  God. 

6a.  The  judge  advocate  asks  the  ac- 
cused if  he  desires  a  copy  of  the  record 
of  his  trial,  and  gives  the  reporter  the 
necessary  instructions. 

7.  Tlie  judge  advocate  and  the  ac- 
cused stand  up.  The  judge  advocate 
reads  aloud  to  the  accused  the  order 
convening  the  court,  and  together  with 


Night  Operations 


39 


any  other  orders  modifying  the  detail, 
and  states  to  the  accused :  Of  the  of- 
ficers named  in  this  order  {or  these 
orders),  the  following  are  present 
(names  the  officers  of  the  court  pres- 
ent). Have  you  any  objection  to  being 
tried  by  any  officer  present?  This  is 
known  in  military  law  as  "  the  right 
of  challenge." 


of  the  accused :  The  accused  objects  to 
Captain  Jones,  on  the  ground  that 
{stating  the  grounds  upon  which  the 
objection  is  based).  The  challenged 
member  is  then  given  an  opportunity  to 
make  a  statement  in  reply  to  thje 
challenge. 
Note. — A  positive  declaration  by  the  chal- 
lenged   member   that   he   is   not   prejudiced 


O   PRESIDENT 


iO 


MEMBER  NO 

MEMBER  N0.3  O 
MEMBER  tiO.6  O 
MEMBER  Nd.T  O 
MEMBER  NO.i»    O 


D 
D 


D 
□ 
D 


O    MEMBER  Ne.2 

O  MEMBER  N0.4 
O  MEMBER  NO.B 
O  MEMBER  Naa 
O    MEMBER  NO.tO 


ACCUSED 


COUNSEL 


o 


o 


o 


REPORTER 


o 

JUDGE  ADVOCATE 


o 


o 


Note. — Members  of  a  general  or  special 
court-martial  may  be  challenged  by  the  ac- 
cused or  by  the  judge  advocate,  but  only  for 
cause  stated  to  the  court.  The  court  deter- 
mines the  relevancy  and  validity  thereof,  and 
does  not  receive  a  challenge  to  more  than 
one  member  at  a  time.  (18th  Article  of 
War.) 

Should  the  accused  object  to  being 
tried  by  any  member  of  the  court  pres- 
ent, the  counsel  would  state  in  behalf 


WITNESS 
INTERPRETER 

against  the  accused,  nor  interested  in  the  case, 
is  ordinarily  satisfactory  to  the  accused. 

If  the  statement  is  not  satisfactory  to 
the  accused,  he  may  at  this  time  state : 
/  am  not  satisfied  with  the  statement  of 
Captain  Jones  and  request  that  he  be 
put  upon  his  voir  dire.  The  judge  ad- 
vocate and  the  challenged  member 
standing,  the  judge  advocate  adminis- 
ters the  following  oath  to  him:  You 
swear  that  you  will  true  answers  make 


40 


Night  Operations 


to  questions  touching  upon  your  com- 
petency as  a  member  of  the  court  in  this 
case.  So  help  you  God.  The  member 
is  then  examined  by  the  accused  (gen- 
erally through  his  counsel),  in  the  same 
manner  that  a  juror  is  examined  in 
criminal  courts.  Upon  the  completion 
of  this  examination  the  president  an- 
nounces :  The  court  will  be  closed. 

8.  The  challenged  member,  the  ac- 
cused and  his  counsel,  and  spectators,  if 
any;  the  judge  advocate,  the  reporter, 
the  interpreter,  withdraw  from  the 
court  room  and  the  court  is  said  to  be 
"  closed."  The  remaining  members  of 
the  court  deliberate  upon  the  question 
as  to  whether  or  not  the  challenged 
member  shall  sit  as  a  member  of  the 
court  in  the  case.  They  arrive  at  a  de- 
cision by  vote,  beginning  with  the  junior 
member,  the  majority  carrying  the  de- 
cision. 

Note. — Courts  are  liberal  in  passing  upon 
challenges  and,  when  there  is  any  valid  rea- 
son given,  sustain  them. 

Having  arrived  at  a  decision,  the 
president  announces  that  the  court  is 
opened  and  the  judge  advocate  is  so 
notified.  This  is  generally  done  by 
ringing  a  bell. 

9.  Those  who  withdrew  now  enter 
the  court  room  and  take  their  places 
and  the  president  announces  the  de- 
cision of  the  court  as :  The  objection  to 
Captain  Jones  is  sustained,  and  he  will 
be  excused  as  a  mefmber  of  the  court  in 
this  case,  or  The  objection  to  Captain 
Jones  is  not  sustained  and  he  will  sit  as 
a  member  of  the  court  in  this  case. 

If  the  challenged  member  be  excused, 
he  will  immediately  withdraw.  All 
members  of  the  court  junior  to  him  in 
rank  will  change  their  seats  so  as  to 
preserve  the  prescribed  arrangement  of 
the  court  according  to  rank. 

The  judge  advocate  then  interrogates 
the  accused :  Have  you  any  objection  to 
any  other  member  of  the  court,  present? 
Should  the  accused  have  objection,  he 
will  challenge  the  member  objected  to 
and  the  same  procedure  as  above  will 
be  observed.  If  he  does  not  object  to 
any  other  member  he  will  state:  There 
is  no  further  objection.  The  judge  ad- 
vocate may  now  in  like  manner  chal- 
lenge any  member  of  the  court 


Should  any  member  of  the  court  be- 
lieve himself  to  be  the  accuser  in  the 
case,  he  will  at  this  point  formally  an- 
nounce that  fact  to  the  court,  where- 
upon he  will  be  excused.  When  the 
judge  advocate,  the  accused,  his  coun- 
sel, or  any  member  of  the  court  has 
reason  to  believe  that  any  member 
thereof  may  be  called  as  a  witness  for 
the  prosecution,  such  belief  shall  be 
communicated  to  the  court  and,  if  the 
judge  advocate  states  that  the  member 
is  to  be  called,  he  will  be  excused. 
When  there  are  no  further  challenges 
to  be  considered  by  the  court,  the  presi- 
dent announces :  The  court  will  be 
sworn. 

10.  All  the  members  of  the  court,  the 
judge  advocate  and  all  other  persons 
in  the  court  room  stand,  and  the  fol- 
lowing oath  is  administered  by  the 
judge  advocate — who  holds  right  hand 
uplifted — to  the  members  of  the  court: 
You  (naming  each  member  of  the  court 
present)  do  swear  {or  affirm)  that  you 
will  well  and  truly  try  and  determine, 
according  to  the  evidence,  the  matter 
now  before  you,  between  the  United 
States  of  America  and  the  person  to  be 
tried,  and  that  you  will  duly  administer 
justice,  without  partiality,  favor  or  af- 
fection, according  to  the  provisions  of 
the  rules  and  articles  for  the  govern- 
ment of  the  Armdes  of  the  United 
States,  and  if  any  doubt  should  arise 
not  explained  by  said  articles,  then  ac- 
cording to  your  conscience,  the  best  of 
your  understanding,  and  the  custom  of 
war  in  like  cases,  and  you  do  further 
swear  (or  affirm)  that  you  will  not  di- 
vulge the  findings  or  sentence  of  the 
court  until  they  shall  be  punished  by  the 
proper  authority,  except  to  the  judge  ad- 
vocate and  assistant  judge  advocate; 
neither  will  you  disclose  or  discover  the 
vote  or  opinion  of  any  particular  mem- 
ber of  the  court-martial,  unless  required 
to  give  evidence  thereof  as  a  witness  by 
a  court  of  justice  in  due  course  of  law. 
So  help  you  God. 

As  the  name  of  each  member  of  the 
court  is  called  he  raises  his  right  hand 
and  retains  it  in  that  position  until  the 
reading  of  the  oath  is  completed  and 
acknowledged. 

While  all  remain  standing,  the  presi- 


Night   Operations 


41 


dent  of  the  court  administers  the  fol- 
lowing oath  to  the  judge  advocate:  You 
(naming  the  judge  advocate)  do  swear 
(or  affirm)  that  you  will  not  divulge 
the  findings  or  sentence  of  the  court  to 
any  but  the  proper  authority  until  they 
shall  be  duly  disclosed  by  the  same.  So 
help  you  God. 

Upon  completion  of  the  swearing  of 
the  court  and  the  judge  advocate,  the 
court  is  said  to  be  organized. 

11.  At  this  point,  if  there  is  an  in- 
terpreter, he  is  sworn  by  the  judge  ad- 
vocate— both  standing — with  the  follow- 
ing oath:  You  swear  (or  affirm)  that 
you  will  truly  interpret  in  the  case  now 
in  hearing.    So  help  you  God. 

12.  If  a  delay  in  the  case  is  necessary, 
either  on  the  part  of  the  prosecution  or 
the  defence,  it  should  be  made  at  this 
time. 

13.  The  judge  advocate  then  reads  the 
charges  and  specifications  preferred 
against  the  accused  and  the  accused  is 
called  upon  to  plead  to  them.  In  case 
of  several  charges  and  specifications, 
the  order  pursued  is  to  arraign  on  the 
first,  second,  etc.,  specifications  to  the 
first  charge,  then  on  the  first  charge, 
and  so  on  with  the  rest.  During  the 
reading  of  the  charges  the  judge  advo- 
cate and  the  accused  stand.  The  judge 
advocate  puts  the  question  to  the  ac- 
cused after  the  reading  of  each  specifi- 
cation and  charge :  How  plead  you? 
All  of  this  constitutes  the  arraignment. 

14.  The  accused  is  called  upon  to 
plead  to  each  charge  and  specification. 
Ordinarily  the  plea  of  the  accused  is 
guilty  or  not  guilty  to  each  charge  and 
specification ;  or,  guilty  of  a  specifica- 
tions excepting  certain  words,  and  of 
the  excepted  words  not  guilty;  or  when 
charged  with  an  offence  which  includes 
a  lesser  one  of  kindred  degree,  guilty 
of  the  specification  except  certain 
words,  substituting  certain  other  words, 
and  to  the  charge  not  guilty,  but  guilty 
of  the  lesser  kindred  offense. 

For  example :  in  a  trial  for  desertion, 
the  accused,  by  substituting  words  in 
the  specification  that  covers  the  offence 
of  absence  without  leave,  may  plead 
guilty  to  them,  but  not  guilty  to  the 
part  of  the  specification  that  covers  de- 
sertion.   In  the  charge,  he  may  substi- 


tute :    as   not  guilty   of   desertion   but 
guilty  of  absence  without  leave. 

The  pleas  are  generally  entered  by  the 
counsel  on  behalf  of  the  accused.  If 
the  accused  questions  the  jurisdiction 
of  the  court  he  may  here  enter  a  plea 
to  the  jurisdiction,  or,  if  iany  other  plea 
is  appropriate,  it  must  be  entered  at  this 
time.  For  example:  a  plea  in  abate- 
ment, or  a  plea  in  bar  of  trial. 

15.  Should  the  accused  plead  guilty, 
the  president  of  the  court  will  halt  the 
proceedings  and  explain  to  the  ac- 
cused the  meaning  of  such  a  plea,  ask 
him  if  he  understands  the  same,  and 
question  him  to  such  extent  that  there 
can  be  no  misunderstanding  of  the 
action  he  has  taken  in  pleading  guilty. 
He  will  explain  to  the  accused  the 
penalty  that  the  court  may  impose  for 
such  an  offence  and  make  certain  that 
the  accused  fully  understands  it. 

16.  The  prosecution,  conducted  by  the 
judge  advocate,  then  begins  the  pres- 
entation of  the  case.  The  judge  advo- 
cate announces:  The  judge  advocate 
desires  to  introduce  (naming  the  wit- 
ness) as  a  witness  for  the  prosecution. 
The  witness  enters.  The  judge  advo- 
cate directs  him  to  hold  up  his  right 
hand.  (If  he  is  wearing  gloves,  the 
judge  advocate  directs  him  to  remove 
the  right-hand  glove).  The  following 
oath  is  administered  by  the  judge  advo- 
cate, both  he  and  the  witness  standing: 
You  swear  or  affirm  that  the  evidence 
that  you  shall  give  in  the  case  now  in 
hearing  shall  be  the  truth,  the  whole 
truth,  and  nothing  but  the  truth.  S( 
help  you  God. 

The  judge  advocate  directs  the  wit- 
ness to  be  seated  in  the  witness  chair 
and  cautions  him  to  speak  slowly  and 
distinctly  to  the  court  in  order  that  all 
may  hear  what  he  has  to  say.  The 
judge  advocate  then  proceeds  to  the  di- 
rect examination  of  the  witness,  in  the 
case  of  a  military  witness,  by  asking: 
State  your  name,  rank,  organisation 
and  station,  or  in  the  case  of  a  civilian 
witness,  State  your  name  and  residence 
Then  follows  the  identification  of  the 
accused :  Do  you  know  the  accused?  If 
so,  state  who  he  is. 

Tlien  follow  any  other  questions 
that  the  judge  advocate  desires  to  ask 


42 


Night  Operations 


the  witness  in  the  prosecution  of  the 
case. 

17.  At  the  conclusion  of  the  direct 
examination,  the  judge  advocate  an- 
nounces that  fact  and  the  witness  is 
turned  over  to  the  defence  for  the  cross- 
examination  by  the  counsel  for  the 
accused.  The  judge  advocate  is  then 
given  an  opportunity  to  re-examine  the 
witness  and  the  defense  to  re-cross- 
examine  the  witness.  At  the  conclusion 
of  all  this  the  president  inquires :  Ques- 
tions by  the  members  of  the  court  f  and 
the  members  of  the  court  are  then  per- 
mitted to  ask  any  questions  they  desire. 
Upon  the  completion  of  this,  the  wit- 
ness is  excused. 

18.  Should  a  question  be  asked  of  a 
witness,  either  by  the  prosecution  or  by 
the  defence,  to  which  objections  is 
made  by  the  opposite  party  in  the  case, 
the  party  objecting  will  announce,  be- 
fore the  witness  has  had  an  opportun- 
ity to  answer :  /  object  to  that  question, 
after  which  he  states  the  grounds  upon 
which  the  objection  is  based.  The  op- 
posite party  is  then  given  an  oppor- 
tunity to  reply  to  the  objection  and, 
after  all  conversation  on  the  matter 
has  been  concluded,  the  president  an- 
nounces :  The  court  will  be  closed.  All 
persons  in  the  court  room,  other  than 
the  members  of  the  court,  will  with- 
draw. The  court  deliberates  the  ques- 
tion and  a  vote  is  taken  on  the  subject, 
starting  with  the  junior  member  of 
the  court.  The  majority  rules.  If 
there  is  a  tie  vote,  the  proposition  is 
lost.  The  president  announces :  The 
court  is  opened.  Those  who  withdrew 
are  recalled,  as  indicated  in  paragraph 
8.  The  president  announces :  The  ob- 
jection is  sustained,  and  the  question 
will  not  be  answered,  or.  The  objection 
is  not  sustained,  and  the  witness  will 
proceed  to  answer  the  question.  In  the 
latter  case  the  question  is  again  asked 
and  the  witness  required  to  answer. 

19.  After  all  the  witnesses  for  the 
prosecution  have  been  examined  the 
judge  advocate  will  introduce  any  docu- 
mentary evidence  he  may  have  to  place 
before  the  court  for  its  consideration. 
Documentary  evidence  may  be  intro- 
duced at  any  time,  though  the  rule  is 


that  it  will  be  introduced  at  the  con- 
clusion of  the  examination  of  the  wit- 
nesses for  one  side  or  the  other. 

After  the  judge  advocate  has  con- 
cluded his  side  of  the  case  for  the  gov- 
ernment he  announces :  The  prosecu- 
tion here  rests.  The  witnesses  for  the 
defence  are  then  called  as  indicated 
by  the  counsel  for  the  accused  and 
their  examination  proceeds  as  for 
those  of  the  prosecution.  The  counsel 
for  the  accused  conducts  the  direct  ex- 
amination and  the  judge  advocate  the 
cross-examination.  The  defence  then 
submits  any  documentary  evidence  that 
it  desires  considered  and,  when  there 
is  nothing  further,  the  counsel  an- 
nounces :  The  accused  desires  to  be 
sworn  as  a  witness  in  his  own  behalf, 
or,  The  accused  desires  to  make  a 
verbal  statement  in  his  own  behalf,  or. 
The  accused  desires  to  submit  a  writ- 
ten statement  in  his  own  behalf.  In 
the  first  case,  where  the  accused  is 
sworn  as  a  witness  in  his  own  behalf, 
he  is  examined  by  the  counsel  for  the 
defence  and  is  subject  to  cross-exam- 
ination by  the  judge  advocate  and  to 
questions  by  members  of  the  court.  In 
the  second  case  the  accused  merely 
makes  a  verbal  statement  to  the  court, 
which  is  unsworn,  and  may  be  taken 
for  what  it  is  worth ;  in  the  third  case 
the  accused  submits  a  written  state- 
ment to  the  court  which  is  read  by 
the  judge  advocate  and  appended  to  the 
record  of  the  court  as  a  part  of  the 
record  in  the  case. 

20.  Following  this,  the  counsel  for  the 
defence  is  given  an  opportunity  to  make 
a  summing  up  of  the  case  and  an  argu- 
ment for  the  accused.  This  is  followed 
by  the  action  of  the  judge  advocate 
who  may  make  answer  to  the  argument 
of  the  defence.  In  case  the  judge 
advocate  has  nothing  further,  he  an- 
nounces :  The  judge  advocate  submits 
the  case  without  remark.  In  any 
event,  the  judge  advocate,  on  behalf 
of  the  government,  has  the  last  word 
in  the  case.  The  president  announces : 
The  court  ■mil  be  closed. 

21.  All  persons  in  the  court  room 
withdraw  except  the  members  of  the 
court,  who  proceed  to  a  finding  in  the 


Night  Operations 


43 


case.  After  deliberating  over  the  case 
to  such  extent  as  may  be  necessary  and 
discussing  it  to  the  extent  desired  by  the 
members,  the  president  announces :  In 
the  absence  of  objection,  we  will  pro- 
ceed to  vote  on  a  finding  in  this  case. 

The  president  reads,  or  causes  to  be 
read,  the  first  specification  and  then 
calls  upon  each  member,  starting  with 
the  junior,  to  register  his  vote  on  the 
finding.  The  remaining  specifications 
to  a  charge  are  taken  up  in  their  order 
and  each  voted  on  in  like  manner. 
Then,  the  charge  is  voted  on.  The  mem- 
bers register  their  votes :  guilty  or,  not 
guilty,  or,  sustain  the  plea,  or,  guilty  as 
plead.  The  president  of  the  court  re- 
cords the  votes  and  announces  the  re- 
sult at  the  end  of  each  voting  period. 
The  majority  rules.  In  case  of  a  tie 
in  the  vote  upon  a  certain  specification 
the  finding  is  "  not  guilty,"  in  other 
words,  the  accused  is  given  the  benefit. 

22.  After  arriving  at  a  finding  on  all 
the  specifications  and  charges,  and  hav- 
ing verified  same,  the  president  an- 
nounces :  The  court  will  be  opened. 
The  judge  advocate  is  notified  and  the 
parties  that  withdrew  return  to  the 
court  room  as  in  paragraph  8.  The 
president  inquires :  Is  there  anything 
further  to  submit  in  this  case? 

If  there  is  nothing  further,  the  judge 
advocate  so  announces.  If  there  is 
evidence  of  previous  convictions  that 
have  been  referred  to  the  court  by 
proper  authority,  the  judge  advocate 
announces :  The  judge  advocate  has 
the  following  evidence  of  previous 
convictions  to  present  for  the  consid- 
eration of  the  court,.  The  judge  advo- 
cate reads  the  evidence  of  previous 
convictions  and,  after  completing  each 
case,  the  accused  is  permitted  to  verify 
the  same  and  add  such  remarks  as  may 
be  appropriate.  The  president  an- 
nounces :  The  court  will  be  closed.  All 
except  the  members  of  the  court  again 
withdraw,  and  the  court  proceeds  to  a 
sentence  in  the  case. 

23.  In  arriving  at  a  sentence,  after  a 
finding  of  guilty,  the  court  proceeds  as 
follows : 

(a)  One  member  of  the  court  is  de- 
tailed to  verify  the  maximum 


limit  of  punishment  that  may 
be  awarded  in  the  case.  This 
precaution  is  taken  to  avoid  a 
sentence  greater  than  the 
maximum   authorized. 

(i»)  The  president  of  the  court  calls 
upon  members  to  submit  sen- 
tences. Those  who  so  desire, 
write  out  a  sentence  on  a 
piece  of  paper  and  pass  it  to 
the  president.  When  one  or 
more  have  been  received,  the 
president  arranges  them  in  the 
order  of  their  severity  and  in- 
quires :  Are  any  other  sen- 
tences proposed?  If  there  be 
none,  the  president  selects  the 
least  severe  sentence  that  has 
been  proposed,  reads  it,  and 
calls  for  a  vote  on  it. 

(c)  The  members  vote  "yes,"  indi- 
cating that  they  concur  in  the 
sentence  or  "  no,"  indicating 
that  they  do  not  concur  in  it. 
The  voting  starts  with  the 
junior  member  of  the  court, 
and  proceeds  as  indicated  pre- 
viously when  voting  on  the 
finding.  The  president  records 
the  vote  and  announces  the  re- 
sult. The  majority  rules.  If 
there  is  a"  tie  vote  the  sentence 
is  lost.  In  this  case  the  court 
proceeds  to  vote  in  like  man- 
ner upon  the  next  least  severe 
sentence  proposed.  Should 
this  also  be  lost,  voting  is  con- 
tinued on  sentences  tmtil  one 
is  carried.  This  is  the  sen- 
tence of  the  court. 

24.  The  judge  advocate  is  recalled 
and  the  president  gives  him  the  findings 
and  sentence,  which  he  preserves  for 
record  in  the  case.  The  court  then  pro- 
ceeds to  the  consideration  of  other 
business  or  adjourns  to  meet  at  the 
call  of  the  president;  or  adjourns  to 
meet  at  a  certain  time;  or  takes  a  re- 
cess for  such  a  time. 

25.  In  the  preparation  of  the  record 
of  a  case  the  reporter  writes  up  all  the 
proceedings,  entering  everything  that 
transpires  during  the  trial,  including 
all  the  evidence,  objections,  rulings  of 
the  court,  etc.    The  judge  advocate  is 


44 


Night  Operations 


required  to  enter  the  findings  and  the 
sentence  in  the  record  in  his  own  hand- 
writing or  on  a  typewriter,  in  which 
latter  case  he  is  required  to  certify 
that  he  personally  recorded  the  find- 
ings and  sentence.  The  record  of  the 
trial  is  signed  by  the  president  of  the 
court  and  the  judge  advocate,  sealed, 
and  mailed  to  the  convening  authority 
for  final  action. 

Q.  In  comparison  with  the  proceedings  of 
a  civil  court,  what  are  the  duties  of 
the  members  and  of  the  judge  advo- 
cate of  a  court-martial? 

A.     The  members   of  the  court  act  in  the 
capacity  of  both  judge  and  jury. 
2.  The  judge  advocate  is  the  prosecuting 
attorney,  or  state's  attorney. 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  by  a  member  of  the 
court  when  he  is  unable  to  attend  a 
session? 

A.  He  will  communicate  the  cause  to  the 
judge  advocate,  and  the  same  will  be 
entered  on  the  record  of  the  pro- 
ceedings. 

Q.  Who  is  the  president  of  a  general  court- 
martial? 

A.  The  president  of  the  court  is  not  an- 
nounced. The  senior  officer  present 
acts  as  president. 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  president  of  a 
general  court-martial? 

A.  1.  He  has  the  ordinary  duties  and  priv- 
ileges of  the  member  of  a  court. 

2.  He  is  the  organ  of  the  court  to  main- 
tain order  and  conduct  its  business. 

3.  He  speaks  and  acts  for  the  court  in 
every  instance  where  a  rule  of  action 
has  been  prescribed  by  law,  regfula- 
tions  or  its  own  resolution. 

4.  He  administers  the  oath  to  the  judge 
advocate. 

5.  He  authenticates  by  his  signature,  all 
acts,  orders  and  proceedings  of  the 
court  requiring  it. 

6.  He  takes  the  proper  steps  to  insure 
prompt  trial  and  disposition  of  all 
charge  referred  to  the  court  and  keeps 
the  court  advised  thereof. 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  judge  advo- 
cate with  regard  to  the  accused  prior  to 
the  assembling  of  the  court  for  his 
trial? 

A.  1.  He  should  acquaint  the  accused  with 
the  accusations  against  him. 


2.  He  should  inform  him  of  his  right  to 
have  counsel,  and  arrange  for  the  de- 
tail of  counsel  when  one  is  desired  by 
the  accused. 

3.  He  should  inform  him  of  his  right  to 
testify  in  his  own  behalf  or  to  make 
a  statement  to  the  court. 

4.  He  should  furnish  him  with  a  copy  of 
charges  against  him  if  so  desired. 

5.  He  may  ask  the  prisoner  how  he  in- 
tends to  plead ;  but,  when  the  accused 
is  an  enlisted  man,  he  should  in  no  case 
try  to  induce  him  to  plead  guilty  or 
leave  him  to  infer  that  if  he  does  so 
his  punishment  will  be  lighter. 

Q.  When  the  accused  decides  to  plead 
"  Guilty,"  what  are  the  duties  of  the 
judge  advocate  towards  him? 

A.  1.  Advise  him  of  his  right  to  introduce 
evidence  in  explanation  of  his  offence, 
and  assist  him  in  securing  it. 
3.  During  the  trial  he  will  see  that  the 
accused  has  full  opportunity  to  inter- 
pose such  pleas  and  make  such  defence 
as  may  best  bring  out  the  facts,  the 
merits,  or  the  extenuating  circum- 
stances of  the  case. 
3.  In  so  far  as  such  action  may  be  taken 
without  prejudice  to  the  accused,  any 
advice  given  him  by  the  judge  advocate 
should  be  given  or  repeated  in  open 
court  and  noted  on  the  record. 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  a  judge  advocate 
with  respect  to  the  witnesses  before 
the  trial  of  a  case  begins? 

A.  He  will  summon  the  necessary  witnesses, 
make  a  preliminary  examination  of 
those  for  the  prosecution,  and,  as  far 
as  possible,  systematize  his  plans  for 
conducting  the  case. 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  a  judge  advo- 
cate during  the  trial  of  a  case? 

A.  1.  He  conducts  the  case  for  the  govern- 
ment and  prepares  the  record. 

2.  He  executes  all  the  orders  of  the  court. 

3.  He  reads  the  convening  order  to  the 
accused;  swears  the  members  of  the 
court,  the  interpreter,  the  reporter  and 
all  witnesses. 

4.  He  arraigns  the  accused;  examines  the 
witnesses. 

5.  He  keeps  or  superintends  the  keeping 
of  an  accurate  record  of  the  proceed- 
ings and  affixes  his  signature  to  each 
day's  proceedings. 


Military  Law — Concluded  (April,  1917) 


Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  counsel  of  the 
accused  f 

A.  He  should  guard  the  interests  of  the 
accused  by  all  honorable  and  legitimate 
means  known  to  the  law,  as  far  as  con- 
sistent with  military  interests.  He 
should  not  obstruct  the  proceedings 
with  frivolous  and  manifestly  useless 
objections. 

Q.  May  a  soldier  be  detailed  as  the  ste- 
nographer of  a  court? 

A.  He  may.  He  will  be  allowed  extra  pay  at 
the  rate  of  5  cents  for  each  100  words 
taken  in  shorthand  and  transcribed. 

Q.  Under  what  conditions  is  a  challenged 
member  of  a  court  excused? 

A.  1.  That  he  sat  as  a  member  of  a  court  of 
inquiry   that  investigated  the  charges. 

2.  That  he  has  personally  investigated  the 
charges  and  expressed  an  opinion 
thereon,  or  that  he  has  formed  a  posi- 
tive and  definite  opinion  as  to  the  guilt 
or  innocence  of  the  accused. 

3.  That  he  is  the  accuser. 

4.  That  he  is  to  be  a  witness  for  the 
prosecution. 

5.  That  (upon  a  rehearing  of  the  case)  he 
sat  as  a  member  on  a  former  trial. 

6.  That,  in  the  case  of  the  trial  of  an 
officer,  the  member  will  be  promoted  by 
dismissal  of  the  accused. 

7.  That  he  is  related  by  blood  or  marriage 
to  the  accused. 

8.  That  he  has  a  declared  enmity  against 
the  accused. 

Q.  May  the  judge  advocate  challenge  mem- 
bers of  the  court? 

A.  While  there  is  no  statutory  authority  for 
it,  the  practice  is  that  he  may. 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  by  a  member  of  a 
court  who  has  not  been  challenged, 
but,  nevertheless,  believes  himself  to  be 
disqualified? 


A.  He  may  announce  his  disqualification  in 
open  court  in  order  that  he  may  be 
challenged,  or  he  may  apply  to  the 
appointing  authority  to  be  relieved. 

Q.  What  are  the  different  pleas  in  court- 
martial  procedure? 

A.  1.  Plea  to  the  jurisdiction. 

2.  Plea  in  abatement. 

3.  Plea  in  bar  of  trial. 

4    Plea  to  the  general  issue. 
Q.  What  is  a  plea  to  the  jurisdiction? 
A.  A  plea  to  the  jurisdiction  denies  the  right 

of  the  court  to  try  the  case. 
Q.  What  are   the  grounds  for   the  plea   to 

the  jurisdiction? 
A.  1.  That  the  court  was  appointed  by   an 

officer    who    did    not    have    the    legal 

authority  to  do  so. 

2.  That  it  is  composed  wholly  or  in  part 
of  members  not  authorized  to  sit  upon 
such  a  court-martial. 

3.  That  the  accused  is  not  subject  to  the 
jurisdiction  of  the  court. 

4.  That  the  court  has  not  the  legal  power 
to  try  the  offense  charged. 

Q.  What  is  a  plea  in  abatement? 

A.  It  is  based  upon  some  defect  in  the  charge 
or  specification,  and  is  one  that  oper- 
ates merely  to  delay  the  trial.  An 
accused  who  submits  a  plea  in  abate- 
ment must  show  how  the  error  may  be 
corrected.  The  judge  advocate  will 
correct  the  error  so  as  to  meet  the 
objection,  and  the  trial  proceeds. 

Q.  What  are  the  pleas  in  bar  of  trial? 

A.  1.  Statute  of  Limitations. 

2.  Pardon. 

3.  Constructive  condonation. 

Q.  What  is  the  Statute  of  Limitations? 

A.  They  are  statutes  of  which  the  accused 
may  take  advantage,  thereby  depriving 
the  Government  of  the  power  to  try  or 
punish  him  after  the  lapse  of  a  specified 

46 


46 


Night  Operations 


period  following  the  commission  of  the 
offense.  They  are  enacted  to  secure 
the  prompt  punishment  of  criminal 
offenses,  and  to  obtain  the  attendance 
of  the  witnesses  at  the  trial  while  the 
recollection  of  the  event  is  still  fresh 
in  their  minds.  In  court-martial  prac- 
tice, prosecutions  are  limited  both  as 
to  time  and  as  to  number. 

Q.  For  what  crimes  are  there  no  statutes 
of  limitations? 

A.  1.  Desertion  in  time  of  war. 

2.  Mutiny. 

3.  Murder. 

Q.  In  what  cases  is  the  statutory  period  ex- 
tended to  three  years? 
A.  1.  Desertion  in  time  of  peace. 

2.  The  crimes  (felonies)  enumerated 
under  the  93rd  Article  of  War. 

3.  The  crimes  and  offenses  (Frauds 
against  the  Government)  enumerated 
in  the  94th  Article  of  War. 

Q.  What  is  the  ordinary  period  of  the  statute 
of  limitations? 

A.  Two  years. 

Q.  How  is  the  time  of  the  statute  of  limi- 
tations computed? 

A.  The  point  at  and  from  which  the  period 
of  limitation  begins  is  the  date  of  the 
commission  of  the  offense.  The  point 
at  which  the  period  of  limitation  termi- 
nates, and  from  which  said  period  is 
to  be  reckoned  back,  is  the  date  of  the 
arraignment  of  the  accused. 

Q.  What  periods  of  time  are  excluded  in  the 
computation  of  the  period  of  limita- 
tion? 

A.  1.  The  period  of  any  absence  of  the 
accused  from  the  jurisdiction  of  the 
United  States. 
2.  Any  period  during  which,  by  reason  of 
some  manifest  impediment,  the  accused 
shall  not  have  been  amenable  to  mili- 
tary justice. 

Q.  In  military  practice  may  a  person  be  tried 
twice  for  the  same  offense? 

A.  He  may  not. 

Q.  What  constitutes  a  "  trial? " 

A.  When  the  accused  has  been  duly  con- 
victed or  acquitted  by  a  court-martial 
he  has  been  "tried." 

Q.  What  is  meant  by  pardon? 

A.  A  pardon  is  the  act  of  the  President 
which  exempts  the  individual  on  whom 


it  is  bestowed  from  the  punishment 
which  the  law  inflicts  for  the  crime 
that  he  has  committed. 

Q.  What  is  meant  by  constructive  condona- 
tion? 

A.  Where  a  deserter  has  been  restored  to 
duty,  without  trial,  by  the  authority 
competent  to  order  his  trial,  this  action 
is  regarded  as  a  constructive  condona- 
tion of  the  offense  and  may  be  pleaded 
in  bar  of  trial  subsequently  ordered. 

Q.  What  are  some  of  the  inadmissible 
special  pleas? 

A.  1.  Former  punishment;  that  is,  the  ac- 
cused has  already  been  adequately  pun- 
ished by  his  commanding  officer  for  the 
offense. 

2.  Illegal  enlistment;  that  is,  that  the  ac- 
cused claims  to  have  enlisted  under  age, 
without  the  necessary  consent  of  his 
parents  or  guardian. 

3.  Release  from  arrest. 

4.  Undergoing  sentence  of  a  court- 
martial. 

5.  Long  delay  in  bringing  to  trial,  but 
within  the  period  of  the  statutes  of 
limitation. 

6.  Malice  of  the  accuser. 

7.  Bad  character  of  the  accuser. 

8.  Intoxication. 

9.  Insanity. 

10.  Obedience  to  military  order. 

11.  Mistake  of  fact  or  law. 

Q.  What  are  the  pleas  to  the  general  issue? 

A.  Usually  the  plea  of  the  accused  is 
"guilty"  or  "not  guilty"  to  each 
charge  and  specification;  or,  guilty  to 
a  specification,  excepting  certain  words, 
and  to  the  excepted  words  not  guilty; 
or,  as  when  charged  with  an  offense 
which  includes  a  lesser  one  of  a  kin- 
dred nature,  guilty  to  the  specification 
excepting  certain  words  and  substitut- 
ing therefor  certain  others,  to  the  ex- 
cepted words,  not  guilty;  to  the  sub- 
stituted words,  "  guilty,"  and  to  the 
charge  not  guilty,  but  guilty  of  the 
included  lesser  offense. 

Q.  When  a  plea  of  guilty  is  entered,  does  that 
exclude  evidence  being  taken? 

A.  It  does  not.  The  court  should  take  evi- 
dence after  a  plea  of  guilty,  except 
when  the  specification  is  so  descrip- 
tive as  to  disclose  all  the  circumstances 
of  mitigation  or  aggravation. 


Night  Operations 


47 


Q.  What  action  is  taken  upon  a  plea  of 
guilty  entered  by  the  accused? 

A.  The  president  of  the  court  is  required  to 
explain : 

1.  The  various  elements  which  constitute 
the  offense  charged. 

2.  The  maximum  punishment  which  may 
be  adjudged  by  the  court  for  the  offense 
to  which  the  accused  has  pleaded 
guilty. 

Note. — The   accused    will   then   be   asked 
whether  he  fully  understands  that,  by  plead- 
ing guilty  to  such  a  charge  or  specification, 
he  admits  having  committed  all  the  elements 
of  the  crime  or  offense  charged,  and  that  he 
may  be  punished  as  stated.     If  he  replies  in 
the  affirmative,  the  plea  of  guilty  will  stand; 
otherwise  a  plea  of  not  guilty  will  be  entered. 
Q.  When  an  accused  pleads  guilty  and  there- 
after  makes  a  statement  at  variance 
with  his  plea,  what  action  is  taken? 
A.  The  plea  of  guilty  is  withdrawn  and  a 
plea  of  not  guilty  substituted  therefor. 
Q.  May  a  plea   of  "guilty,  without   crimi- 
nality "  be  entered. 
A.  No.    It  is  the  same  as  a  plea  of  not  guilty. 
Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  an  accused 
refuses  to  plead,  stands  mute,  or  an- 
swers irrelevantly? 
A.  The  court  proceeds  to  trial  and  judgment 

as  if  he  had  pleaded  "  not  guilty." 
Q.  What  is  a  nolle  prosequi? 
A.  A  declaration  of  record  on  the  part  of 
the   prosecution   that    it   withdraws    a 
charge   or    specification    from   the   in- 
vestigation and  will  not  prosecute  the 
same  at  the  trial. 
Q.  Who  has  authority  to  enter  a  nolle  pro- 
sequi? 
A.  The  convening  authority. 
Q.  What  are  the  principal  grounds  for  nolle 

prosequi  in  court-martial  practice? 
A.  1.  The  fact  that  the  charge  or  specifica- 
tion  is   discovered  to  be  substantially 
defective  and  insufficient  in  law. 

2.  That  it  is  ascertained  the  allegations 
cannot  be  proved. 

3.  That  the  testimony  available  is  not 
sufficient  to  sustain  the  allegations. 

4.  That  the  criminality  of  one  of  the  ac- 
cused, where  there  are  several,  cannot 
be  established. 

5.  That  it  is  proposed  to  use  one  of  the 
accused  as  a  witness. 


Q.  Who  procures  the  attendance  of  witnesses 

before  a  court-martial? 
A.  The  judge  advocate. 

Q.  How  is  the  attendance  of  witnesses 
ordinarily  secured? 

A.  1.  Persons  in  the  military  service  sta- 
tioned at  or  near  the  place  of  trial: 
(o)  By  informal  notice  served  by  the 
judge  advocate  upon  the  person  con- 
cerned. (&)  If  for  any  reason  a  formal 
notice  is  required,  the  judge  advocate 
will  request  the  commanding  officer  to 
order  the  witness  to  attend. 

2.  Persons  in  the  military  service  sta- 
tioned at  points  distant  from  the  place 
of  trial,  when  mileage  is  involved: 
The  judge  advocate  will  request  that 
orders  issue  for  witness  to  attend. 

3.  Civilian  witnesses :  The  judge  advo- 
cate will  endeavor  to  secure  attendance 
by  correspondence,  sending  the  witness 
subpoenas  in  duplicate  and  a  request 
to  accept  service  by  correspondence. 
If  such  informal  methods  are  ineffec- 
tive, formal  duplicate  subpoena  will  be 
issued  by  the  judge  advocate  for  ser- 
vice on  the  witness.  If  the  witness  is  at 
or  near  the  post  where  the  court  is 
sitting,  service  may  be  made  by  the 
judge  advocate  or  by  a  person  desig- 
nated by  him.  If  the  witness  is  at  or 
near  another  post,  the  judge  advocate 
will  send  the  subpoena  direct  to  the 
commanding  officer  of  such  post,  re- 
questing the  service  of  same.  If  the 
witness  does  not  reside  near  any  mili- 
tary post  or  command,  the  judge  advo- 
cate will  send  the  subpoena  to  the 
department  commander  requesting 
service. 

Q.  In  what  class  of  cases  are  depositions 
prohibited? 

A.  They  cannot  be  introduced  by  the  prose- 
cution in  capital  cases. 

Q.  What  is  a  subpoena  duces  tecum? 

A.  It  is  a  subpoena  requiring  a  person  to 
present  himself  before  the  court, 
bringing  with  him  certain  books,  papers 
or  documents  which  it  is  desired  to 
introduce  in  evidence. 

Q.  How  may  the  attendance  of  a  civilian 
witness  be  compelled? 

A.  By  a  warrant  of  attachment. 


48 


Night  Operations 


Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  a  warrant  of 

attachment  becomes  necessary? 
A.  1.  The  judge  advocate  will  issue  the  war- 
rant of  attachment  and  deliver  it  to 
the  officer  designated  by  the  depart- 
ment commander  for  execution. 
2.  The  following  papers  will  accompany 
the  warrant   of   attachment. 

(o)  The  original  order  (and  modi- 
fying orders)  appointing  the 
court  for  the  trial  of  the  case 
in  which  the  witness  is  to 
testify. 

(b)  A    copy    of    the    charges    and 

specifications    in   the    case   as 
referred  for  trial. 

(c)  The  original  subpoena,  with  the 

proof  of  service. 

(d)  An  affidavit  of  the  judge  advo- 

cate or  summary  court  officer 
that  the  person  being  attached 
is   a   material    witness    in   the 
case;   that  he  has   failed  and 
neglected  to  appear,  although 
sufficient  time  has  elapsed  for 
that    purpose;    and    that    no 
valid  excuse  has  been  offered 
for  such  failure  to  appear. 
Q.  What  action  is  necessary  when  force  has 
to  be  resorted  to  to  compel  the  atten- 
dance of  a  witness? 
A.  The   post   commander   nearest   the   resi- 
dence of  the  witness  will  furnish  a  mili- 
tary   detail    sufficient    to    execute   the 
process. 
Q.  If,  while  serving  a  warrant  of  attachment 
for  a  witness,  an  oMcer  is  served  with 
a  writ  of  habeas  corpus  from  a  United 
States  Court  or  a  United  States  Judge, 
what  action  is  taken? 
A.  1.  The  writ   will  be  promptly  obeyed. 

2.  The  person  alleged  to  be  illegally  re- 
strained of  his  liberty  will  be  taken 
before  the  court  from  which  the  writ 
has  issued. 

3.  A  return  will  be  made  setting  forth 
the  reasons  for  the  restraint. 

4.  The  officer  upon  whom  such  a  writ  is 
served  will  at  once  report  by  telegraph 
the  fact  of  such  service  direct  to  the 
Adjutant  General  of  the  Army  and  to 
the  Commanding  General  of  the  de- 
partment. 

Q.  If  a  writ  of  habeas  corpus  is  issued  by  a 


state   court   or  judge,  what  action  is 
taken? 

A.  1.  The  officer  will  make  respectful  re- 
turn, in  writing,  informing  the  court 
that  he  holds  the  person  named  in  the 
writ,  by  authority  of  the  United  States, 
pursuant  to  a  warrant  of  attachment, 
issued  under  Section  3  of  the  Act  of 
Congress,  approved  August  29th,  1916, 
by  a  judge  advocate  of  a  lawfully  con- 
vened general,  special  (or  summary) 
court-martial,  and  that  the  Supreme 
Court  of  the  United  States  has  decided 
that  state  courts  and  judges  are  with- 
out jurisdiction  in  such  cases. 
2.  After  having  made  the  return,  it  is  the 
duty  of  the  officer  to  hold  the  prisoner 
in  custody  under  his  warrant  of  attach- 
ment, and  to  refuse  obedience  to  the 
mandate  or  process  of  any  government 
except  that  of  the  United  States. 
3.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  officer  not  to  take 
the  prisoner,  nor  suffer  him  to  be  taken, 
before  a  state  judge  or  court  upon  a 
writ  of  habeas  corpus  issued  under 
state  authority. 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  a  civilian  zvit- 
ness,  who  has  been  duly  subpoenaed 
before  a  general  court-tnartial,  refuses 
to  appear  or  qualify  as  a  witness? 

A.  He  will  at  once  be  tendered  or  paid,  by 
the  nearest  quartermaster,  one  day's  fees 
and  mileage  for  the  journeys  to  and 
from  the  court  and  will  thereupon  be 
again  called  upon  to  comply  with  the 
requirements  of  the  law. 

The  23rd  Article  of  war  (new)  provides: 
Every  person  not  subject  to  military  law, 
who,  being  duly  subpoenaed  to  appear  as  a 
witness  before  a  military  court,  commission, 
court  of  inquiry,  or  board,  or  before  any 
officer,  military  or  civil,  designated  to  take 
a  deposition  to  be  read  in  evidence  before 
such  court,  commission,  court  of  inquiry,  or 
board,  wilfully  neglects  or  refuses  to  appear, 
or  refuses  to  qualify  as  a  witness,  or  to 
testify,  or  produce  documentary  evidence 
which  such  person  may  have  been  legally 
subpoenaed  to  produce,  shall  be  deemed 
guilty  of  a  misdemeanor,  for  which  such 
person  shall  be  punished  on  information  in 
the  district  court  of  the  United  States,  or 
in  a  court  of  original  criminal  jurisdiction  in 
any  of  the  territorial  possessions  of  the 
United  States,  jurisdiction  hereby  being  con- 
ferred upon  such  courts,  for  such  purpose; 
and  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  United  States 
District  Attorney  or  other  officer  prosecuting 
for  the  government  in  any  such  court  of 


Night  Operations 


original  criminal  jurisdiction,  on  the  certifi- 
cation of  the  facts  to  him  by  the  military 
court,  commission,  court  of  inquiry,  or  board, 
to  file  an  information  against  and  prosecute 
the  person  so  offending,  and  the  punishment 
of  such  person,  on  conviction,  shall  be  a 
fine  of  not  more  than  $500,  or  imprisonment 
not. to  exceed  six  months,  or  both,  at  the 
discretion  of  the  court :  Provided  that  the 
fees  of  such  witness  and  his  mileage,  at  the 
rates  allowed  to  witnesses  attending  the  courts 
of  the  United  States,  shall  be  duly  paid  or 
tendered  said  witness,  such  amounts  to  be 
paid  out  of  the  appropriation  for  the  com- 
pensation of  witnesses. 

Q.  May  a  court-martial  punish  for  contempt? 

A.  A  court-martial  may  punish,  at  discre- 
.  tion,  subject  to  the  limitations  in  A.  W. 
14  (with  respect  to  summary  courts) 
any  person  who  uses  any  menacing 
words,  signs  or  gestures  in  its  presence, 
or  who  disturbs  its  proceedings  by  any 
riot  or  disorder.  Such  punishments 
require  the  approval  of  the  reviewing 
authority  in  order  to  become  effective. 

Q.  Under  what  circumstances  are  depositions 
admissible  before  court-martialf 

A.  A  duly  authenticated  deposition,  taken 
upon  reasonable  notice  to  the  opposite 
party,  may  be  read  in  evidence  before 
any  military  court  or  commission  in 
any  case  not  capital;  or  in  any  pro- 
ceeding before  a  court  of  inquiry  or  a 
military  board,  if  such  deposition  is 
taken  in  cases  where  the  witness  re- 
sides, is  found,  or  is  about  to  go, 
beyond  the  state,  territory  or  district 
in  which  the  court,  commission,  or 
board  is  ordered  to  sit;  or  beyond  the 
distance  of  100  miles  from  the  place 
of  trial  or  hearing ;  or  when  it  appears 
to  the  satisfaction  of  the  court,  com- 
mission, or  board,  or  appointing  author- 
ity that  the  witness,  by  reason  of  age, 
sickness,  bodily  infirmity,  imprison- 
ment, or  other  reasonable  cause,  is 
unable  to  appear  and  testify  in  person 
at  the  place  of  trial  or  hearing;  pro- 
vided, that  testimony  by  deposition  may 
be  adduced  for  the  defense  in  capital 
cases. 

Q.  What  is  the  procedure  when  depositions 
are  to  be  taken? 

A.  1.  All  the  interrogatories  to  be  pro- 
pounded are  entered  on  the  form  for 
interrogatories  and  deposition,  and 
the     trial     judge-advocate,     summary 


court  officer,  or  recorder  will  take  ap- 
propriate steps  to  cause  the  desired 
deposition  to  be  taken  with  the  least 
practicable  delay. 

2.  In  an  ordinary  case  he  will  either 
send  the  interrogatories  to  the  com- 
manding officer  of  the  post,  recruiting 
station  or  other  military  command  at 
or  near  which  the  person  whose  de- 
position is  desired  is  stationed,  re- 
sides or  is  understood  to  be;  or  will 
send  them  to  some  other  responsible 
person,  preferably  a  person  competent 
to  administer  oaths,  at  or  near  the 
place  at  which  the  person  whose  depo- 
sition is  desired  is  understood  to  be. 
In  a  proper  case,  the  interrogatories 
may  be  sent  to  the  department  or 
superior  commander  or  to  the  witness 
himself,  and  in  any  case  they  will,  when 
necessary,  be  accompanied  by  a  proper 
explanatory  letter. 

3.  When  interrogatories  are  received  by  a 
commanding  officer  he  will  either  take, 
or  cause  to  be  taken,  the  deposition 
thereon.  He  may  send  an  intelligent 
enlisted  man — preferably  a  noncommis- 
sioned officer,  if  available — to  the  neces- 
sary place  for  the  purpose  of  obtain- 
ing the  deposition,  or  he  may  arrange 
by  mail  or  otherwise  that  the  deposition 
be  taken.  The  deposition  will  be  taken 
with  the  least  practicable  delay  and, 
when  taken,  will  be  sent  at  once  direct 
to  the  judge  advocate  of  the  court- 
martial  trying  the  case. 

4.  If  the  witness  whose  deposition  is 
desired  is  a  civilian,  the  judge  advo- 
cate, or  other  person  sending  inter- 
rogatories, will  inclose  with  them  a 
prepared  voucher  for  the  fees  and 
mileage  of  the  witness,  leaving  blank 
such  spaces  therein  as  may  be  neces- 
sary, together  with  the  required  num- 
ber of  copies  of  the  order  appointing 
the  court,  commission  or  board.  The 
judge  advocate,  summary  court  officer, 
or  recorder  will  also  send  with  the  inter- 
rogatories a  subpoena  in  duplicate  re- 
quiring the  witness  to  appear  in  person 
at  the  time  and  place  to  be  fixed  by  the 
officer,  military  or  civil,  who  is  to  take 
the  deposition.  If  the  name  of  this 
officer  is  not  known,  the  space  provided 
for  it  will  be  left  blank. 


50 


Night  Operations 


.  5.  If  a  military  officer  takes  the  deposi- 
tion, he  will  complete  the  witness 
voucher,  certify  it,  and  transmit  it  to 
the  nearest  disbursing  quartermaster 
for  payment. 

6.  When  the  deposition  is  taken  by  a  civil 
officer,  he  will  be  asked  to  obtain  and 
furnish  to  the  military  officer,  requested 
or  designated  to  take  the  deposition  or 
cause  it  to  be  taken,  the  necessary  data 
for  the  completion  of  the  witness 
voucher,  and  the  latter  will  complete 
the  voucher,  certify  it,  and  transmit  it 
to  the  nearest  disbursing  quartermaster 
for  payment. 

7.  In  the  case  of  military  witnesses,  sub- 
poena will  not  accompany  the  inter- 
rogatories, but  the  officer  before  whom 
the  deposition  is  to  be  taken  will  take 
the  necessary  steps  to  have  the  wit- 
nesses appear  at  the  proper  time  and 
place. 

Q.  What  is  the  duty  of  the  court  with  re- 
spect to  the  protection  of  witnesses? 

A.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  court  to  protect 
every  witness  from  irrelevant,  insulting, 
or  improper  questions ;  from  harsh  or 
insulting  treatment,  and  from  unneces- 
sary inquiry  into  his  private  affairs. 
The  court  must  forbid  any  questions 
which  appear  to  be  intended  to  insult 
or  annoy  any  witness,  or  which,  though 
proper  in  themselves,  appear  to  be 
needlessly  offensive  in  form. 

Q.  Under  what  conditions  may  evidence  of 
character '  and  the  services  of  the  ac- 
cused be  important? 

A.  1.  When  the  evidence  of  the  guilt  is  not 
strong  and  the  good  reputation  of  the 
accused  will  strengthen  the  presump- 
tion of  innocence. 

2.  When  the  punishment  is  discretionary, 
such  evidence  may  be  introduced  with 
a  view  to  inducing  the  court  to  impose 
a  milder  sentence. 

3.  When  the  punishment  is  mandatory, 
such  evidence  may  be  introduced  with 
a  view  to  inducing  the  court  to  recom- 
mend clemency. 

4.  In  any  case,  such  evidence  may  be 
introduced  with  a  view  to  inducing  the 
reviewing  authority  to  extend  clemency. 

Q.  Is  evidence  of  the  bad  character  of  the 

accused  admissible? 
A.  It  is  not    If  the  accused  takes  the  wit- 


ness stand  in  his  own  behalf,  his  ver- 
acity as  a  witness  may  be  attacked  as 
in  the  case  of  any  other  witness. 

Q.  May  the  accused  appear  as  a  witness  in 
his  own  behalf? 

A.  Yes.  The  accused  "  shall  at  his  own  re- 
quest, but  not  otherwise,  be  a  com- 
petent witness.  His  failure  to  make 
such  request  shall  not  create  any  pre- 
sumption  against   him." 

Q.  What  procedure  is  required  when  the 
accused  declines  to  appear  as  a  witness 
in  his  own  behalf  or  to  make  a  state- 
ment? 

A.  In  every  case  tried  by  a  general  court- 
martial,  in  which  the  accused  does  not 
testify  or  make  a  statement  in  his  own 
behalf,  it  must  appear  on  record  that 
the  president  of  the  court  explained  to 
the  accused  that  he  was  privileged  to 
testify  in  his  own  behalf  if  he  so  de- 
sire or  to  make  an  unsworn  statement 
to  the  court  in  denial,  in  explanation, 
or  in  extenuation  of  the  offense  with 
which  he  stood  charged.  The  explana- 
tion by  the  president,  and  the  reply  of 
the  accused  thereto,  shall  appear  upon 
the  record  of  the  trial.  The  same 
rule  applies  in  the  case  of  a  special 
court-martial,  where  the  evidence  is 
recorded. 

Q.  What  are  the  general  rules  regarding 
the  examination  of  witnesses. 

A.  1.  They  are  usually  examined  separately. 
This   rule   is   not  inflexible.     It   is  in 
practice   subject   to   the   discretion   of 
the  court,   and  it  is   never  so   rigidly 
observed  as  to  exclude  the  testimony 
of   one   witness   because   he  has   been 
present   at   the   examination   of   other 
witnesses. 
2.  The  examination  of  witnesses  usually 
proceeds  in  the  following  sequence: 
(o)  Witnesses    for   the   prosecution, 
direct,  cross,  re-direct  and  re- 
cross,  examination. 
(&)  Witnesses  for  the  defense  in  the 
same  order  as  (a). 

(c)  Witnesses  for  the  prosecution  in 

rebuttal  in  the  same  order  as 
in  (a). 

(d)  Witnesses    for   the    accused    in 

rebuttal  of  those  introduced 
by  the  prosecution,  in  the 
order  specified  in  (a). 


Night  Operations 


51 


(e)  Witnesses  for  the  court,  in  the 
order  specified  in  (a). 
The  court  may,  in  the  interest  of  truth  and 
justice,  call  or  recall  witnesses  or  permit 
their  recall  at  any  stage  of  the  proceedings. 
It  may  permit  material  testimony  to  be  in- 
troduced by  either  party  quite  out  of  its 
regular  order  and  place,  and  permit  a  case 
once  closed  by  either  or  both  sides  to  be 
reopened  for  the  introduction  of  testimony 
previously  omitted,  if  convinced  that  such 
testimony  is  so  material  that  its  omission 
would  leave  the  investigation  incomplete. 
In  all  such  cases,  both  sides  must  be  present, 
and  any  testimony  thus  received  is  subject  to 
cross-examination  and  rebuttal  by  the  party 
to  whom  it  may  be  adverse. 

3.  Leading  questions  which  a  witness  may 
answer  by  "  yes  "  or  "  no  "  should  not 
be  asked,  except  on  cross-examination; 
to  abridge  the  proceedings  where  the 
witness  may  be  led  at  once  to  points 
on  which  he  is  to  testify;   when  the 
witness   appears   to  be  hostile   to  the 
party  calling  him,  or  is  manifestly  un- 
willing to  give  evidence;  where  there 
is  an  erroneous  statement  in  the  testi- 
mony,   evidently    caused    by    fault    of 
memory,  and  where  the  nature  of  the 
case  is  such  that  the  mind  of  the  wit- 
ness cannot  be  directed  to  the  subject 
under  inquiry  by  other  means. 
Q.  Are  affidavits  admissible  in  evidence f 
A.  They  are  not,  unless  expressly  consented 
to  by  the  judge  advocate  and  the -ac- 
cused,   with    full    knowledge    of    his 
rights. 
Q.  What    restriction    is    placed    upon    the 
knowledge  of  the  court  with  reference 
to  statement  of  service  and  the  evidence 
of  previous  convictions  of  the  accused? 
A.  The  court  will  not  be  permitted  to  see 
either  until  after  they  have  arrived  at 
a   finding.     The   statement   of   service 
may  be  introduced  in  evidence  by  the 
accused  as  proof  of  good  character. 
Q.  What    previous  convictions  will  be  con- 
sidered by  a  court-martial? 
A.  1.  Only    those    covering    offenses    com- 
mitted within  the  year  prior  to  the  date 
of  the  offense  for  which  the  accused 
is  being  tried,  and  in  the  current  en- 
listment. 
2.  These   will  be   considered   only   when 
they  are  properly  referred  by  the  con- 
vening authority. 


Q.  What  is  the  object  of  introducing  evi- 
dence of  previous  conznctions  before 
court-martial  on  the  finding  of  guilty? 

A.  The  object  is  to  see  if  the  prisoner  is  an 
old  offender,  and  therefore  less  en- 
titled to  leniency  than  if  on  trial  for  his 
first  offense. 

Q.  What  is  the  rule  regarding  the  punishment 
to   be  awarded. 

A.  That  the  least  punishment  by  which  dis- 
cipline can  be  efficiently  maintained  is 
the  proper  amount. 

Q.  What  are  the  legal  punishments  that  gen- 
eral court-martials  woy  impose  upon 
officers? 

A.  1.  Death. 

2.  Dismissal,  with  confinement  at  hard 
■labor. 

3.  Dismissal. 

4.  Loss   of   rank. 

5.  Suspension  from  rank,  command,  or 
duty,  with  or  without  loss  of  pay  or 
part  of  pay. 

6.  Fine  or  forfeiture  of  pay. 

7.  Confinement  to  limits  of  post  or  com- 
mand. 

8.  Reprimand.  > 

9.  Admonition. 

Q.  What    legal    punishments    may    courts- 
martial  impose  upon   enlisted  men? 
A.  1.  Death. 

2.  Dishonorable  discharge. 

3.  Confinement  at  hard  labor. 

4.  Forfeiture  of  pay. 

5.  Hard  labor  without  confinement. 

6.  Forfeiture  of  pay  and  allowances. 

7.  Detention  of  pay. 

8.  Reprimand. 

Q.  What  are  the  rules  regarding  the  dis- 
honorable discharge  of  a  soldier? 

A.  1.  A  dishonorable  discharge  can  be  im- 
posed only  pursuant  to  the  sentence  of 
a  general  court-martial. 

2.  The  date  on  which  the;  order  pro- 
mulgating the  sentence  is  received  at 
the  post  where  the  soldier  is  held,  is 
the  date  of  discharge. 

3.  A  sentence  adjudging  a  dishonorable 
discharge  to  take  effect  at  such  period 
during  a  term  of  confinement  as  may 
be  designated  by  the  reviewing  author- 
ity, is  illegal. 

Q.  May  the  deposits  of  a  soldier  be  forfeited 
by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial? 

A.  They  may  not.  They  are  exempt  from 
liability  to  sentence  of  a  court-martial, 


52 


Night  Operations 


imposing  a  forfeiture  of  pay  and  allow- 
ances. To  sentence  a  soldier  to  deposit 
a  certain  amount  of  his  pay  is  illegal. 

Q.  When  a  disciplinary  punishment  is 
awarded  a  soldier  by  his  company  com- 
mander, what  record  is  made  of  it? 

A.  A  brief  record  will  be  made  showing : 

1.  Name  of  the  accused. 

2.  Brief  statement  of  the  offense,  showing 
time  and  place. 

3.  Statement  as  to  whether  or  not  the 
accused  demanded  trial  by  summary 
court. 

4.  Disposition  of  case,  with  date  and  pun- 
ishment awarded. 

5.  Whether  or  not  appeal  was  made  to 
higher  authority. 

6.  Decision  of  higher  authority  on  appeal. 

7.  Whether  accused  was  required  to  serve 
punishment  pending  appeal. 

Q.  What  limitations  are  placed  on  courts- 
martial  in  imposing  punishments  on 
soldiers? 

A.  1.  Punishing  by  branding,  tattooing  or 
marking  the  body,  or  by  flogging  is 
prohibited. 

2.  The  following  have  been  discarded: 
Carrying  loaded  knapsack;  wearing 
irons;  shaving  the  head;  placarding; 
pillory;  stocks,  and  tying  up  by  the 
thumbs. 

3.  Military  duty  as  a  form  of  punishment 
tends  to  degrade  duty  and  is  to  the 
prejudice  of  the  best  interests  of  the 
service.  Punishment,  such  as  imposing 
tours  of  guard  duty,  requiring  a  sol- 
dier to  blow  all  calls  for  a  period  of 
time,  are  not  imposed. 

4.  Solitary  confinement  on  bread  and 
water  diet,  and  the  placing  of  a  prisoner 
in  irons,  are  regarded  as  a  means  of 
enforcing  prison  discipline.  They  are 
not  to  be  imposed  by  a  court-martial 
as  a  punishment. 

Q.  Where  are  the  limits  of  punishment  that 
may  he  imposed  by  a  court-martial  upon 
a  soldier  on  conviction  to  be  found? 

A.  The  latest  executive  order  on  the  subject 
became  operative  on  March  1st,  1917, 
as  to  offenses  committed  on  and  after 
that  date,  and  as  to  criminal  acts  com- 
mitted prior  to  that  date,  whose  maxi- 
mum punishment  was  not  prescribed  in 
the  Executive  Order  of  September  Sth, 
1914,  published  in  G.  O.  No.  70.    This 


order  remains  operative  as  to  offenses 
committed  before  March  1st,  1917,  ex- 
cept as  to  criminal  acts  whose  maxi- 
mum  punishment  has   been   decreased 
by  this  order. 
Q.  What  are    the   general   limitations   with 
regard  to  the  punishment  that  a  court- 
martial  may  impose  on  a  soldier? 
A,  1.    A  court  shall  not,  by  a  single  sentence 
which    does   not   include   dishonorable 
discharge,   adjudge  against   a   soldier: 
(a)  Forfeiture    of    pay    at    a    rate 
greater  than  two-thirds  of  his 
pay  per  month. 
(&)  Forfeiture  of  pay  in  an  amount 
greater  than  two-thirds  of  his 
pay  for  six  months. 
{c)  Confinement  at  hard  labor  for  a 
period  greater  than  six  months. 
2.  A  court  shall  not,  by  a  single  sentence, 
adjudge  against  a  soldier: 

(a)  Detention    of    pay    at    a    rate 
greater  than  two-thirds  of  his 
pay  per  month. 
(&)  Detention  of  pay  in  an  amount 
greater  than  two-thirds  of  his 
*  pay  for  three  months, 

(c)  Hard  labor  without  confinement 
for  a  period  greater  than  three 
months. 
Q.  May  general  prisoners  be  tried  by  sum- 
mary court? 
A.  They  may, 

Q.  May  the  summary  court  officer  he  chal- 
lenged by  the  accused? 
A.  The  summary  court  officer  is  not  subject 

to   challenge. 
Q.  What  is  the  limit  of  punishment  that  may 
be  imposed  upon  a  soldier  by  the  sum- 
mary court? 
A.  Not  to  exceed  confinement  at  hard  labor 
for  three  months,  or  forfeiture  of  three 
months'  pay,  or  both;  and,  in  addition 
thereto,  reduction  to  the  ranks  in  the 
cases  of  noncommissioned  officers,  and 
reduction  in  classification  in  the  cases 
of  first-class  privates. 
Q.  When  the  summary  court  officer  is  also 
the  commanding  officer,  what  action  is 
necessary  with  respect  to  a  sentence  of 
the  summary  court? 
A.  No    sentence    of    such    summary    court- 
martial,  adjudging  confinement  at  hard 
labor  or  forfeiture  of  pay,  or  both,  for 
a  period  in  excess  of  one  month,  shall 


Night  Operations 


53 


be    carried    into    execution    until    the 

same  has   been   approved  by   superior 

authority. 
Q.  What    are    the    functions    of    summary 

courts-martial? 
A.  1.  Power  to  administer  oaths. 

2.  To  hear  and  determine  cases  and,  when 
•     satisfied   of   the   guilt   of   the   accused 

party,   to   adjudge   the   punishment  to 
be  inflicted. 
The  following  is  the  procedure  in  the  in- 
stitution  and   conduct   of   a   trial   before   a 
summary  court-martial: 

1.  A  summary  court  officer  is  appointed 
in  every  command  by  the  commanding 
officer  thereof,  either  in  formal  orders 
or  verbally.  This  officer  is  usually  the 
officer  next  in  rank  to  the  commanding 
officer,  but  may  be  any  officer  whom 
the  commanding  officer  selects. 
*  2.  A  soldier  commits  an  offense  for  which 
he  may  be  properly  tried  by  summary 
court.  Oiarges  and  specifications  are 
preferred  against  him  on  the  blank 
forms  provided  for  that  purpose. 
These  charges  are  made  in  triplicate 
and  forwarded  to  the  commanding 
officer  for  his  action.  They  are  usually 
handed  in  at  the  adjutant's  office  with 
the  morning  report,  but  may  be  sub- 
mitted at  any  time. 

3.  The  charge   sheet  contains : 

1.  The  name  and  rank  of  the  accused. 

2.  Statement  of  service. 

3.  Date  of  arrest  or  confinement. 

4.  Number   of   previous   convictions. 

5.  Witnesses  for  the  prosecution  and 

defense. 

6.  A  statement  of  the  charge. 

7.  A  statement  of  the  specification. 

8.  Signature  of  the  officer  preferring 

the  charges. 

4.  The  commanding  officer  determines 
whether  or  not  the  case  shall  be 
brought  to  trial  and,  when  trial  is  de- 
cided upon,  the  charges  are  forwarded 
by  indorsement  to  the  summary  court 
officer,  the  indorsement  being  signed  by 
the  adjutant. 

5.  The  summary  court  usually  sits  at  a 
stated  hour  daily,  except  Sunday  (no 
legal  objection  to  sitting  on  Sunday), 
at  such  time  as  will  least  interfere  with 
the  training  of  troops.     The  accused 

'  and  all  witnesses  are  ordered  to  appear 


at  the  specified  time,  and  the  trial  pro- 
ceeds much  in  the  manner  of  civil 
police  courts. 

6.  The  accused  is  brought  before  the  sum- 
mary court  officer,  who  reads  the 
charges  and  specifications  to  him  and 
calls  upon  him  to  plead  to  same.  The 
plea  is  usually  "  guilty  "  or  "  not  guilty." 

Note, — When  the  accused  pleads  guilty  the 
summary  court  officer  will  explain  to  him : 
(a)  The    elements    constituting    the 
offense  to  which  he  has  pleaded 
guilty,  and 
(fc)  The       maximum       punishment 
therefor. 
He  will  ask  him  whether  he  fully  under- 
stands : 

(c)  That  by  pleading  guilty  thereto, 
he  admits  all  the  elements  of 
the  crime  or  offense,  and 
(&)  That  he  may  be  punished  as  ex- 
plained above. 

7.  Witnesses  for  the  prosecution  are 
called  and  sworn  by  the  summary  court 
officer,  who  conducts  the  direct  exami- 
nation, after  which  the  accused  is  per- 
mitted to  cross-examine.  These  are 
followed  by  the  witnesses  for  the  de- 
fense, who  are  likewise  sworn  and 
examined.  The  accused  may  then  be 
sworn  as  a  witness  in  his  own  behalf, 
make  a  statement  and  be  cross- 
examined  by  the  summary  court,  or  he 
may  make  an  unsworn  statement,  in 
which  case  he  is  not  subject  to  cross- 
examination. 

8.  After  all  the  evidence  has  been  pre- 
sented in  the  case,  the  summary  court 
officer  arrives  at  a  finding  and  enters 
the  same  in  the  appropriate  space  on 
the  blank  form.  This  is  followed  by 
the  sentence  he  imposes  on  the  accused, 
in  case  of  a  finding  of  guilty.  He  then 
signs  the  blank  at  the  place  provided 
for  his  signature. 

9.  The  blanks,  thus  completed,  are  turned 
in  to  the  adjutant,  who  examines  the 
finding  and  verifies  the  sentence  to  see 
that  it  is  not  in  excess  of  the  limit 
prescribed  in  the  executive  order  of  the 
President,  and  submits  them  to  the 
commanding  officer  for  his  action. 

10.  If  the  commanding  officer  concurs  in 
the  sentence,  he  approves  the  same  by 
affixing  his  signature  and  dating  it  at 


54 


Night  Operations 


the  appropriate  place  on  the  blank,  and 
the  record  of  the  court  is  complete  and 
the  sentence  may  be  executed. 

11.  The  second  copy  of  the  blank  is  then 
completed  by  making  it  an  exact  copy 
of  the  original,  and  it  is  certified  as 
a  true  copy  by  the  adjutant. 

12.  The  original  is  filed  at  post  head- 
quarters and  forms  the  permanent 
record  of  cases  tried  by  summary  court. 
The  second  copy,  authenticated  by  the 
adjutant,  is  furnished  the  company 
commander  of  the  accused  and  forms 
the  company  record  of  the  trial.  The 
third  is  forwarded  to  the  officer  having 
general  court-martial  jurisdiction  over 
the  command. 

Q.  What  action  is  necessary  before  a  sentence 
of  a  court-martial  may  be  carried  into 
execution? 

A.  It  must  be  approved  by  the  officer  ap- 
pointing the  court,  or  by  the  officer 
commanding  for  the  time  being.  The 
acquittal  of  the  accused  does  not  en- 
title him  to  be  released  from  confine- 
ment at  once.  The  acquittal  is  not 
effective  until  it  has  been  acted  upon 
by  the  proper  reviewing  authority. 

Q.  What  is  the  effect  of  a  disapproval  of  a 
finding  and  sentence  of  a  court-martial 
on  the  part  of  the  reviezving  authority  f 

A.  A  disapproval  of  the  sentence  of  a  court- 
martial  by  the  reviewing  authority  is 
not  a  mere  expression  of  disapproba- 
tion, but  is  a  final  determinate  act 
putting  an  end  to  the  proceedings  in 
a  particular  case  and  rendering  them 
entirely  nugatory  and  inoperative;  and 
the  legal  effect  of  a  disapproval  is  the 
same  whether  or  not  the  officer  dis- 
approving is  authorized  finally  to  con- 
firm the  sentence.  But  to  be  thus 
operative,  the  disapproval  should  be  ex- 
pressed. The  effect  of  the  entire  dis- 
approval of  a  sentence  is  not  merely  to 
annul  the  same  as  such,  but  also  to 
prevent  the  accruing  of  any  disability 
or  forfeiture,  which  would  have  been 
incidental  on  approval. 

Q.  How  are  general  court-martial  trials  of 
enlisted  men  published  to  the  service? 

A.  By  general  court-martial  orders,  promul- 
gated from  headquarters  of  the  officer 
authorized  to  convene  general  courts- 
martial. 


Q.  What  elements  does  a  G.  C.  M.  O.  con- 
tain? 

A.  So  much  of  the  proceedings  of  the  court 
as  will  give  the  charges  and  specifi- 
cations, the  pleas,  findings,  and  sen- 
tences, and  the  action  and  remarks  of 
the  reviewing  authority  on  the  case.  If 
the  charges  contain  matter  unfit  for 
publication,  it  will  be  omitted  from  the 
order. 

Q.  In  what  case  is  the  confirmation  of  the 
President  required? 

A.  1.  Any  sentence  respecting  a  general 
officer. 

2.  Any  sentence  extending  to  the  dismissal 
of  an  officer,  except  that  in  time  of 
war  a  sentence  extending  to  the  dis- 
missal of  an  officer  below  the  grade  of 
brigadier-general  may  be  carried  into 
execution  upon  confirmation  by  the 
commanding  general  of  the  army  in  the 
field  or  by  the  commanding  general  of 
the  territorial  department  or  division. 

3.  Any  sentence  extending  to  the  supen- 
sion  or  dismissal  of  a  cadet. 

4.  Any  sentence  of  death,  except  in  the 
cases  of  persons  convicted  in  time  of 
war  of  murder,  rape,  mutiny,  deser- 
tion, or  as  spies,  and  in  such  excepted 
cases,  a  sentence  of  death  may  be  car- 
ried into  execution  upon  confirmation 
by  the  commanding  general  of  the 
army  in  the  field,  or  by  the  command- 
ing general  of  the  territorial  depart- 
ment or  division. 

Q.  What  is  meant  by  mitigation  of  punish- 
ment? 

A.  A  reduction  in  quantity  or  quality,  the 
general  nature  of  the  punishment  re- 
maining the  same. 

Q.  May  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial  be 
added  to  in  any  way? 

A.  Neither  the  reviewing  authority  nor  any 
other  officer  is  authorized  to  add  to 
the  punishment  imposed  by  a  court- 
martial. 

Q.  Under  what  circumstances  may  soldiers 
convicted  by  court-martial  be  confined 
in  a  penitentiary? 

A.  1.  Desertion  in  time  of  war. 

2.  Repeated  desertion  in  time  of  peace. 

3.  Mutiny. 

4.  When  the  offense  is  of  a  civil  nature, 
or  by  commutation  of  the  death  sen- 
tence. 


Night  Operations 


55 


5.  On  conviction  of  two  or  more  acts  or 
omissions,  any  one  of  which  is  punish- 
able by  confinement  in  a  penitentiary. 

Q.  What  is  fraudulent  enlistment? 

A.  An  enlistment  procured  by  means  of 
wilful  misrepresentation  in  regard  to  a 
.  qualification  or  disqualification  for  en- 
listment; or  by  intentional  concealment 
of  a  disqualification  which  has  had  the 
effect  of  causing  the  enlistment  of  a 
man  not  qualified  to  be  a  soldier  and 
who,  but  for  such  false  representation 
or  concealment,  would  have  been  re- 
jected. 

Q.  What  elements  must  be  proved  to  convict 
on  a  charge  of  fraudulent  enlistment? 

A.  1.  The  enlistment  of  the  accused  in  the 
military  service  as  alleged. 

2.  That  the  accused  wilfully  misrepre- 
sented a  certain  fact,  or  facts,  regard- 
ing his  qualifications  or  disqualifica- 
tions for  enlistment,  or  wilfully — that 
is,  intentionally — concealed  a  disquali- 
fication as  alleged. 

3.  That  enlistment  was  procured  by  such 
misrepresentation  or  concealment. 

4.  That  under  such  enlistment,  the  accused 
received  either  pay  or  allowances,  or 
both,  as  alleged. 

5.  Where  a  soldier  enlists  without  a  dis- 
charge, the  proof  should  include  the 
fact  that  at  the  time  of  the  alleged  en- 
listment the  accused  was  a  soldier,  and 
that  the  enlistment  was  entered  into 
without  a  regular  discharge  from  the 
former  enlistment. 

Q.  What  is  desertion? 

A.  An  absence  without  leave,  accompanied 
by  the  intention  not  to  return.  Both 
elements  are  essential  to  the  offense. 
The  offense  becomes  complete  when 
the  person  absents  himself  without 
authority  from  his  place  of  service  with 
intent  not  to  return  thereto.  A  prompt 
return  and  repentence  are  no  defense, 
nor  is  it  a  defense  that  the  deserter  at 
the  time  of  departure  intended  to  re- 
port for  duty  elsewhere.  Thus,  a 
soldier  who  leaves  his  post,  intending 
never  to  go  back  unless  a  certain  event 
happens,  or  leaves  his  post  with  such 
intent  and  reports  at  another  post,  is  a 
deserter;  but  unless  such  intent  exists 
at  some  time,  the  soldier  cannot  be  a 
deserter,  whether  his  purpose  is  to  stay 
away  a  definite     or  an  indefinite  time. 


Where  a  soldier,  without  having  been 
discharged,  again  enlists  in  the  army, 
or  in  the  militia  in  the  service  of  the 
United  States,  such  enlistment  is,  by 
the  twenty-ninth  article  of  war,  made 
sufficient  evidence  of  desertion.  In  such 
case,  proof  of  the  intent  to  stay  perma- 
nently away  from  his  former  place  of 
service,  and  the  status  of  absence  with- 
out leave  therefrom,  are  unnecessary. 

Q.  What  elements  must  he  proved  to  convict 
a  soldier  of  desertion? 

A.  1.  That  the  accused  absented  himself  or 
remained  absent  without  authority 
from  his  place  of  service  as  alleged. 

2.  That  he  intended,  at  the  time  of  absent- 
ing himself  or  at  some  time  during  his 
absence,  to  remain  away  permanently 
from  such  place. 

3.  That  his  absence  was  of  a  specified 
duration  and  was  terminated  as  alleged. 

4.  That  his  act  was  done,  if  so  alleged,  in 
the  execution  of  a  certain  conspiracy, 
or  in  the  presence  of  a  certain  outbreak 
of  Indians,  or  of  a  certain  unlawful 
assemblage  which  his  organization  was 
opposing,  or  in  time  of  war,  where  the 
court  will  not  take  judicial  notice  of  the 
existence  of  a  status  of  war. 

5.  Where  the  soldier  enlisted  without  a 
discharge :  that  the  accused  was  a  soldier 
in  a  certain  organization  of  the  army, 
as  alleged;  and  that  without  being  dis- 
charged from  such  organization,  he 
again  enlisted  in  the  army,  navy  or 
marine  corps,  or  some  foreign  army, 
as  alleged.  In  this  case,  proof  of  the 
absence  without  leave  and  of  the  in- 
tention not  to  return  become  unneces- 
sary. 

Q.  What  is  absence  without  leave? 

A.  When  any  person  subject  to  military  law 
is,  through  his  own  fault,  not  at  the 
place  where  he  is  required  to  be,  at  a 
time  when  he  should  be  there,  he  is 
said  to  be  "absent  without  leave,"  or 
AWOL. 

Q.  What     elements     must     be    proved    in 

AWOL. 
A.  1.  Where  the  accused  fails  to  appear  or 
goes  from  a  place  of  duty : 

(o)  That  a  certain  authority  ap- 
pointed a  certain  time  and 
place  for  a  certain  duty  by  the 
accused,  as  alleged. 


56 


Night  Operations 


(b)  That  he  failed  to  report  at  such 
place  at  the  proper  time,   or, 
having  so  reported,  went  from 
the    same    without    authority 
from    any    one    competent    to 
give  him  leave  to  go. 
2.  Where    the   accused    is    charged    with 
absenting  himself  without  proper  leave : 
(o)  That  the  accused  absented  him- 
self from  his  command,  guard, 
quarters,  station,  or  camp  for  a 
certain   period,   as   alleged. 
(b)  That  such  absence  was  without 
authority    from    anyone    com- 
petent to  give  him  leave. 
Q.  Distinguish  between  arrest  and  confine- 
ment f 
A.  The  arrest  of  an  officer  has  been  com- 
pared to  an  enlargement  on  bail,  the 
security    being    the    officer's    commis- 
sion.    It  is   for  this   reason   that  the 
punishment  for  breach  of  arrest  may 
include  dismissal.     The  distinction  be- 
tween  arrest  and   confinement  lies   in 
the  difference  between  the  kind  of  re- 
straint imposed.    In  arrest  the  restraint 
is  moral,  imposed  by  the  orders  fixing 
the  limit  of  the  arrest,  or  by  the  terms 
of  the  Article. 
Q.  What  constitutes  breach  of  arrest? 
A.  The  offense  is  committed  when  the  re- 
strained person  infringes  the  limits  set 
by  orders,  or  by  the  69th  Article  of 
War.     The   intention   or   motive   that 
actuated  him  is  immaterial  to  the  ques- 
tion of  guilt,  though,  of  course,  proof 
of  inadvertence  or  bona  fide  mistake  is 
admissible  in  guiding  the  court  in  fixing 
punishment.     The  unlawfulness  of  the 
arrest  is  a  valid  defense,  but  innocence 


of  the  accusation  for  which  the  arrest 
is  imposed  is  entirely  irrelevant. 

Q.  What  elements  must  be  proved  to  convict 
of  a  breach  of  arrestt 

A.  1.  That  the  accused  was  duly  placed  in 
arrest. 
2.  That  before  he  was  set  at  liberty  by 
proper  authority  he  transgressed  the 
limits  fixed  by  proper  authority  or  by 
the  69th  Article  of  War. 

Q.  What  is  a   countersign? 

A.  A  countersign  is  a  word  given  from  the 
principal  headquarters  of  a  command 
to  aid  guards  and  sentinels  in  their 
scrutiny  of  persons  who  apply  for  per- 
mission to  pass  the  lines. 

Q.  What  is  a  parole? 

A.  A  parole  is  a  word  used  as  a  check  on 
the  countersign.  It  is  imparted  only  to 
those  who  are  entitled  to  inspect  the 
guards,  and  to  commanders  of  guards. 

Q.  What  constitutes  the  offense  of  making 
known  the  countersign  and  parole? 

A.  The  class  of  persons  entitled  to  receive 
the  countersign  will  expand  and  con- 
tract with  the  varying  circumstances  of 
war.  Who  these  persons  are  will  be 
determined  largely,  in  any  particular 
case,  by  the  general  or  special  orders 
under  which  the  accused  was  acting.  It 
is  no  defense,  under  the  terms  of  this 
law,  that  the  accused  did  not  know  that 
the  person  to  whom  he  communicated 
the  countersign  or  parole  was  not  en- 
titled to  receive  it.  Before  imparting 
such  a  word  it  behooves  a  person  sub- 
ject to  military  law  to  determine  at  his 
peril  that  the  person  to  whom  he  pre- 
sumes to  give  the  countersign  or  parole 
is  entitled  to  receive  it. 


Field  Service  Regulations 


Q.  What  are  the  two  general  classes  of  mili- 
tary information  f 

A.  1.  That  collected  by  the  General  Staff  in 
time  of  peace. 
2.  That  obtained   by   troops   in  the  field 
after  the  outbreak  of  hostilities.     (9) 

Q.  To  what  does  the  information  obtained  in 
time  of  peace  relate? 

A.  To  the  geography,  topography,  resources 
and  military  strength  of  the  various  na- 
tions, and  it  enables  the  War  Depart- 
ment to  decide  upon  the  size  of  an  army 
or  expedition,  the  proportion  of  the  dif- 
ferent arms,  character  of  clothing  and 
equipment,  that  may  be  necessary  in  the 
event  of  war.     (9) 

Q.  To  what  does  the  information,  in  tim^e  of 
war  relate? 

A.  To  the  theatre  of  operations  and  the  posi- 
tion, strength  and  intentions  of  the 
enemy  in  the  field.  The  possession  of 
this  information  is  absolutely  essential  in 
order  that  a  commander  may  properly 
make  his  estimate  of  the  situation,  come 
to  a  decision  as  to  what  he  is  going  to 
do,  and  issue  his  orders.     (9) 

Q.  What  are  the  sources  of  information  in 
the  Held? 

A.  1.  Higher  commanders.  In  issuing  field 
orders,  the  commander,  in  his  first 
paragraph,  gives  all  the  information  of 
the  enemy  and  his  own  troops  in  his 
possession,  or  which  it  is  intended  sub- 
ordinate commanders  should  know. 

2.  Adjoining  troops.  Troops  in  active 
campaign  always  keep  the  commanders 
of  nearby  troops  informed  of  the  action 
they  are  taking. 

3.  Inhabitants.  In  hostile  territory,  influ- 
ential persons,  especially  those  supposed 
to  be  active  in  the  enemy's  cause,  may  be 


seized    and    their   persons    and   houses 
searched. 

4.  Newspapers,  letters  and  telegraph  files. 
Letters  and  newspapers  found  in  post 
offices  and  telegraph  files  are  carefully 
searched  and  everything  of  importance 
sent  to  higher  authority. 

5.  Prisoners.  Prisoners,  captured  from 
the  enemy,  are  carefully  questioned. 

6.  Deserters  and  spies. 

7.  Maps.  Local  maps  of  recent  date  may 
contain  most  valuable  information. 

8.  Reconnaissance.     (9-10) 

Q.  How  does  a  commander  gain  a  knowledge 
of  the  terrain  over  which  he  intends  to 
operate? 

A.  By  a  careful  study~of  available  maps,  sup- 
plemented by  thorough  reconnaissance. 
(9) 

Q.  What  disposition  is  made  of  information 
that  is  gained? 

A.  Information  received  by  any  person  in  the 
military  service,  and  the  action  taken 
thereon,  must  be  promptly  reported  to 
the  proper  military  superior.  This  super- 
ior, in  the  case  of  forces  larger  than  a 
brigade,  is  the  chief  of  staff,  by  whom  it 
is  referred  to  the  intelligence  section  of 
the  general  staff  group  at  headquarters. 
In  the  division  staff  this  is  known  as 
the  third,  or  intelligence,  section  of  the 
general  staff  and  it  concerns  itself  with 
the  movements  and  dispositions  of  the 
enemy,  including  explorations,  recon- 
naissance and  the  gathering  and  dis- 
tribution of  information.     (9-26) 

Q.  What  limitations  are  placed  on  the  dis- 
cussion of  military  information? 

A.  Unless  instructions  are  given  to  spread 
false  information,  all  persons  connected 
with  the  military  service  are  forbidden 

67 


58 


Night  Operations 


to  discuss  the  military  situation,  plans, 
movements,  etc.,  with  or  in  the  presence 
of  civilians  of  any  age,  sex  or  nation- 
ality. 

Q.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  term 
"  reconnaissance  "? 

A.  It  is  a  military  term  used  to  desigrnate 
the  work  of  troops  or  individuals  in 
gathering  information  in  the  field,     (11) 

Q.  When  does  reconnaissance  begin  and  end? 

A.  It  begins  as  soon  as  the  theatre  of  possi- 
ble operations  is  entered  and  ends  at  the 
conclusion  of  the  campaign.  Note:  No 
matter  what  other  sources  of  informa- 
tion may  be  available  reconnaissance 
must  be  depended  upon  to  obtain  the  in- 
formation upon  which  all  tactical  move- 
ments should  be  based.     (11) 

Q.  What  are  the  functions  of  the  aero  squad- 
ron in  reconnaissance? 

A.  In  a  division  or  larger  force,  it  will  oper- 
ate in  advance  of  the  independent  cav- 
alry, for  the  purpose  of  locating  the 
enemy  and  keeping  track  of  his  move- 
ments.    (12) 

Q.  What  are  the  general  duties  of  the  cav- 
alry in  reconnaissance? 

A.  1.  From  the  beginning  of  the  cam- 
paign, it  seeks  to  determine  the  enemy's 
strength  and  dispositions. 

2.  It  protects  its  own  army  against  sur- 
prise, screens  its  movements,  and  in- 
sures the  safety  of  the  other  arms. 

3.  It  defeats  the  opposing  cavalry  and  ex- 
pels it  from  the  field. 

4.  As  the  opposing  armies  draw  nearer  to 
each  other,  it  endeavors  to  secure  control 
of  the  ground  between,  and  bends  every 
effort  to  that  continuous  and  close  recon- 
naissance of  the  enemy's  forces  so  vital 
to  success.     (13) 

Q.  Distinguish  between  independent  cavalry 
and  divisional  cavalry. 

A.  1.  Independent  cavalry  is  a  body  of  cav- 
alry operating  in  advance  of  the  main 
force  and  responsible  only  to  the  su- 
preme commander  of  the  force  with 
which  it  is  operating. 
2.  Divisional  cavalry  is  that  which  is  at- 
tached to  an  infantry  division.  The  force 
normally  attached  to  an  infantry  divi- 
sion is  one  regiment  of  cavalry.  When 
the  division  is  operating  independently, 
this  cavalry  may  be  employed  as  inde- 
pendent cavalry.     When  the  division  is 


operating  as  a  part  of  a  field  army,  the 
divisional  cavalry  is  generally  attached 
to  the  divisional  covering  troops. 

Q.  What  are  the  functions  of  independent 
cavalry? 

A.  1.  It  precedes  the  advance  of  the  force  at 
such  distance  as  may  be  practicable. 

2.  If  it  is  strong  enough  to  defeat  the 
enemy's  cavalry,  it  should  locate  the 
hostile  infantry  and  artillery  and  deter- 
mine their  approximate  strength. 

3.  If  it  is  weaker  than  the  enemy's  cavalry, 
it  must  rely  upon  the  work  of  strategical 
and  tactical  patrols  to  obtain  detailed  in- 
formation of  the  enemy  or  it  must  be 
assisted  by  the  other  arms. 

4.  On  very  wide  fronts,  an  army  is  gen- 
erally covered  by  two  or  more  bodies  of 
independent  cavalry ;  each  is  informed  of 
the  extent  of  ground  it  is  to  cover  and 
keeps  in  touch  with  the  neighboring 
cavalry.     ( 14) 

Q.    What  are  the  functions  of  the  divisional 

cavalry? 
A.  1.  Within  its  powers  and  limitations,   it 

furnishes   immediate   security   for   the 

main  body. 

2.  Though  its  reconnaissance  is  more  re- 
stricted than  that  of  the  independent 
cavalry,  it  goes  more  into  detail  and 
gathers  information  as  to  the  resources 
of  the  country,  roads,  camping  places, 
etc. 

3.  As  combat  becomes  imminent  and  the 
independent  cavalry  is  drawn  off  to  a 
flank,  the  divisional  cavalry  must  be 
especially  active  to  guard  against  sur- 
prise, gain  information  of  the  enemy's 
movements,  and  prevent  the  incursion 
of  his  patrols. 

4.  When  there  is  independent  cavalry  in 
front,  it  maintains  connection  with  it; 
when  not,  it  reconnoitres  far  to  the 
front  and  gains  touch  with  the  enemy. 
(15) 

Q.  What  is  the  general  scope  of  the  infantry 
reconnaissance  ? 

A.  1.  The  close-in  infantry  reconnaissance  is 
necessary  for  the  immediate  security  of 
the  troops  and  to  determine  the  immedi- 
ate dispositions  of  the  enemy. 

2.  In  the  absence  of  cavalry,  extended 
reconnaissance  is  made  by  infantry  pa- 
trols and  scouts. 

3.  When  the  country  is  rough  and  broken, 


Night  Operations 


50 


infantry  reconnaissance  may  be  neces- 
sary. 

Q.  What  factors  determine  the  extent  of  the 
reconnaissance  immediately  preceding 
combat? 

A.  1.  The  time  that  can  be  spared  for  the 
purpose  without  losing  the  initiative  in 
action. 

2.  The  character  of  the  information 
desired. 

3.  The  efficiency  of  the  measures  taken  by 
the  enemy  to  conceal  his  dispositions. 

Q.  Upon  what  does  the  strength  of  the  force 
engaged  in  reconnaissance  depend? 

A.  1.  The  character  of  the  information  de- 
sired. When  detailed  information  of  the 
enemy's  position  is  desired,  the  strength 
of  the  reconnoitring  forces  must  be  suf- 
ficient to  cause  the  deployment  of  his 
infantry  and  the  opening  of  the  fire  by 
at  least  a  part  of  his  artillery. 
2.  The  nature  of  the  hostile  screen.  In  this 
case  the  combat  reconnaissance  may  de- 
velop into  the  opening  phases  of  the 
combat,  and  care  must  be  taken  that 
enough  troops  are  employed  to  change 
the  course  of  the  attack,  if  the  informa- 
tion secured  calls  for  such  action.    (18) 

Q.  Describe  the  successive  steps  of  the  recon- 
naissance and  development  of  an  enemy 
in  position. 

A.  1.  The  independent  cavalry  first  comes  in 
contact,  drives  in  the  enemy  cavalry  and 
gains  such  information  as  is  possible; 
then,  when  the  attacking  force  draws 
near,  it  withdraws  to  one  or  both  flanks. 

2.  The  advance  cavalry,  usually  attached 
to  the  advance  guard,  and  closely 
backed  up  by  it,  continues  the  reconnais- 
sance begun  by  the  independent  cavalry. 

3.  The  advance  of  the  infantry  will  finally 
force  back  all  of  the  advance  detach- 
ments of  the  enemy  and  bare  his  posi- 
tion. The  artillery  will  assist  the  ad- 
vance by  opening  fire  on  any  targets  of 
importance  that  the  infantry  advance 
may  uncover. 

4.  The  enemy  will  have  to  disclose  his 
artillery  and  infantry  positions  to  keep 
down  the  fire  of  the  hostile  artillery  and 
to  stop  the  advance  of  the  opposing 
infantry. 

5.  The  information  thus  gained  will  en- 
able the  commander  to  formulate  his 
plan  of  action.     (19) 


Q.  What  measures  take  the  place  of  recon- 
naissance in  rencontre  or  meeting  en- 
gagements? 

A.  The  measures  for  security  on  the  march 
must  be  relied  upon  to  take  the  place 
of  the  more  complete  reconnaissance 
which  the  necessity  of  obtaining  the 
initiative  in  deployments  forbids.     (19) 

Q.  What  reconnaissance  is  required  of  the 
infantry  during  combat? 

A.  1.  Such  as  will  enable  it  to  keep  contact 
with  the  enemy. 

2.  Acquaint  itself  with  the  terrain  in  the 
front. 

3.  To  protect  its  flanks  and  rear.     (20) 
Q.  What  reconnaissance  is  required  of  the 

aero  squadron  during  combat? 

A.  It  will  operate  around  the  flanks  and  over 
the  rear  of  his  position,  for  the  purpose 
of  reporting  his  dispositions,  the  ap- 
proach of  reinforcements  and  the  begin- 
ning of  a  withdrawal.     (21) 

Q.  What  reconnaissance  is  required  of  cav- 
alry during  combat? 

A.  It  will  conduct  an  extended  reconnais- 
sance with  small  detachments  around 
and  to  the  rear  of  enemy's  position. 
(22) 

Q.  What  is  a  patrol? 

A.  The  term  patrol  is  used  to  designate  small 
detachments  employed  for  a  variety  of 
purposes,  the  name  of  the  detachment  in- 
dicating its  duty  as,  visiting,  connecting, 
combat,  exploring,  reconnoitring, 
flanking,  harassing,  and  pursuing  pa- 
trols. 

Q.  What  is  the  chief  duty  of  reconnoitring 
patrols? 

A.  To  gather  information.  They  habitually 
seek  safety  in  flight,  fighting  only  when 
the  accomplishment  of  their  mission 
demands  it.     (23) 

Q.  How  do  patrols  vary  in  strength? 

A.  From  two  or  three  men  to  a  company. 
(24) 

Q.  What  are  the  advantages  of  small  patrols 
over  strong  patrols? 

A.  1.  They  have  greater  mobility. 

2.  They  are  more  easily  handled  and  con- 
trolled. 

3.  They  do  not  draw  heavily  on  the  fight- 
ing strength  of  the  command.     (24) 

Q.  What  precautions  are  taken  by  the  oM- 
cer  sending  out  the  patrol? 


60 


Night   Operations 


A.  He  verifies  the  detail,  gives  the  necessary 
instructions  and  designates  a  second  in 
command. 
He  eliminates  horses  of  a  conspicuous 
color,  and  those  likely  to  make  a  noise 
when  left  alone. 
He  takes  precautions  to  see  that  equipment 
is  arranged  so  that  it  will  not  glitter  in 
the  sunlight,  nor  rattle.     (24) 

Q.  What  points  are  embraced  in  the  orders 
and  instructions  given  a  patrol  com- 
mander by  the  oiHcer  sending  out  the 
patrol  f 

A.  1.  Where  the  enemy  is  or  is  supposed  to 
be. 

2.  What  information  is  desired. 

3.  What   features  are   of   special  impor- 
tance. 

4.  The  general  direction  to  be  followed. 

5.  Whether  friendly  patrols  are  likely  to 
be  encountered. 

6.  Where  messages  are  to  be  sent  or  where 
the  patrol  is  to  report. 

Note. — Important  and  comprehensive  in- 
structions should  be  in  writing.  Precautions 
against  capture  of  papers  must  be  taken.  It 
must  be  certain  that  orders  are  fully  under- 
stood. Detailed  instruction  is,  as  a  rule, 
avoided.  When  necessary  the  time  of  return 
is  stated.  (24) 
Q.  What  qualifications  should  a  patrol  leader 

possess f 
A.  Patrol  leaders  should  combine  the  qual- 
ities of  good  health,  vigorous  physique, 
keen   eyesight,   presence   of   mind,   and 
courage,  with  good  judgment,  military 
training  and  experience. 
They  should  be  able  to  read  maps,  make 
sketches    and    send    clear    and    concise 
messages. 
Officers  on  such  duty  often  find  themselves 
in  positions  where  it  is  necessary  to  con- 
sider a  situation  from  the  viewpoint  of 
the  commander  and  should  be  able  to 
reason  accordingly.     (25) 
Q.  What  governs  the  formation  adopted  by 

a  patrol f 
A.  No  normal  formation  is  or  should  be  pre- 
scribed. The  patrol  takes  such  forma- 
tion as  may  be  necessary  to  guard 
against  surprise,  usually  with  point  and 
flankers.  Scouts  from  the  patrol  may 
be  sent  out  for  short  distances  in  order 
to   extend  the   sphere  of   observation. 


Whatever  the  formation  it  should  favor 

the  escape  of  at  least  one  man.     (26) 
Q.  How  may  the  composition  of  an  enemy's 

force  on  the  march  be  estimated  from 

the  dust  raised? 
A.  1.  A  thick,  low  cloud  of  dust  indicates 

infantry. 

2.  A  high,  thin  cloud  indicates  cavalry. 

3.  A  broken  cloud  indicates  artillery  or 
wagon  trains.     (27) 

Q.  How   may   the  strength    of   an   enemy's 

force  on  the  march  be  estimated? 
A.  By  the  time  that  it  takes  to  pass  a  given 
point.    A  point  is  passed  in  one  minute 
by 

175  infantry,  in  column  of  squads. 
110  cavalry,  in  column  of  fours,  at 

a  walk. 
200  cavalry,  in  column  of  fours,  at 
a  trot. 
5  guns  or  caissons. 
By  the  amount  of  road  space  occupied  by 
the  column.    In  estimating  it  is  assumed 
that  infantry,  in  column  of  squads,  oc- 
cupies one-half  yard  per  man;  cavalry, 
in  column  of  fours  one  yard  per  trooper ; 
artillery,  20  yards  per  gun  or  caisson. 
(27) 
Q.  If  the  enemy  is  discovered,  what  points 
should  the  patrol  leader's  report  con- 
tain? 
A.  1.  His     exact     location,     whether     de- 
ployed, marching  or  in  camp. 
2.  His  strength  and  composition,     (28) 
0.  What  signals  are  authorized  for  use  by 

patrols? 
A.  1.  Enemy  in  sight,  in  small  numbers :  hold 
the  rifle  above  the  head  horizontally. 

2.  Enemy  in  sight,  in  force:  same  as 
above,  raising  and  lowering  the  rifle. 

3.  Take  cover :  a  downward  motion  of  the 
hand.     (29) 

Q.  What  are  the  several  classes  of  balloons 
and  for  what  service  are  they  employed? 

A  1.  Free  balloons:  used  to  convey  informa- 
tion from  besieged  places,  the  return 
message  being  sent  by  radiotelegraphy 
or  carrier  pigeons. 

2.  Captive  balloons :  for  tactical  recon- 
naissance, observation  of  artillery  fire 
and  signalling. 

3.  Dirigible  balloons:  for  strategical  rec- 
onnaissance, for  travel  to  great  dis- 
tances, to  carry  a  large  number  of  ob- 


Night   Operations 


61 


servers,  radio  equipment,  machine  guns 
or  a  quantity  of  explosives  (30) 

Q.  For  what  classes  of  reconnaissance  are 
aeroplanes  employed? 

A.  Strategical  and  tactical  reconnaissance  and 
the  observation  of  artillery  fire.     (31) 

Q.  What  is  included  in  strategical  recon- 
naissance? 

A.  The  determining  of  the  position,  strength 
and  direction  of  advance  of  the  larger 
elements  of  an  enemy's  force ;  ascertain- 
ing the  character  of  the  roads,  railroads, 
streams,  and  general  military  topogra- 
phy of  the  theatre  of  operations. 

Q.  What  is  the  purpose  of  tactical  recon- 
naissance? 

A.  It  is  designed  to  discover  tactical,  turning 
and  enveloping  movements,  the  position 
and  strength  of  the  enemy's  general  re- 
serve, his  artillery  positions  and  the 
movements  of  his  cavalry,  and  his  tac- 
tical movements  and  dispositions  in  the 
rear  of  his  lines. 

Q.  What  is  a  Held  message? 

A.  In  the  field,  the  term  message  is  generally 
applied  to  written  information  sent  by 
messenger  or  by  wire. 

Q.  What  points  are  required  in  the  compo- 
sition of  Held  messages? 

A.  1.  They  should  be  brief  and  clear,  resem- 
bling telegrams. 

2.  The  source  of  the  information  con- 
tained in  the  message  should  be  given, 
the  writer  separating  what  he  has  ac- 
tually seen  himself  from  that  which  has 
come  to  him  second  hand. 

3.  Expressions  depending  upon  the  view- 
point of  the  observer,  except  when  ref- 
erence is  made  to  the  banks  of  a  stream 
and  the  elements  of  a  body  of  troops, 
should  not  be  used.  Points  of  the  com- 
pass should  be  employed  instead. 

4.  Geographical  names  should  be  printed 
in  Roman  capitals. 

5.  When  two  or  more  features  on  the  map 
have  the  same  name  or  designation, 
they  should  be  designated  by  reference 
to  other  points. 

6.  The  message  should  terminate  with  a 
sentence  telling  the  commander  what 
the  writer  proposes  to  do  next.  As  "I 
remain  in  observation,"  or  "  I  move  to 
cross  roads  45,"  etc. 

Q.  What  is  a  military  report? 


A.  A  more  or  less  formal  account  of  some 
military  enterprise,  undertaking  or 
event,  such  as  a  march,  a  reconnais- 
sance, battle,  etc. 

Q.  What  scales  are  authorized  for  military 
maps  and  sketches? 

A.  1.  One  inch  to  one  mile,  vertical  interval 
60  feet;  used  for  extended  operations. 
The  maps  of  our  own  country  prepared 
by  the  Geological  Survey  are  on  a  scale 
of  1  :  62500  (which  is  approximately  1 
inch  to  the  mile),  with  vertical  interval 
20  feet. 

2.  Three  inches  to  one  mile,  vertical  inter- 
val, 20  feet;  used  for  road  maps  and 
sketches. 

3.  Six  inches  to  one  mile,  vertical  inter- 
val 10  feet;  used  for  position  sketches. 

4.  Twelve  inches  to  one  mile,  vertical  in- 
terval, 5  feet;  used  in  siege  operations 
in  the  field  and  for  war  games.     (34) 

Q.  What  is  a  war  diary? 

A.  A  record  of  events  kept  in  campaign  by 
each  battalion  and  higher  organization, 
each  ammunition,  supply  and  sanitary 
train.  Entries  are  made  daily  and  form 
a  concise  history  of  the  military  opera- 
tions in  which  the  organization  partici- 
pates.    (35) 

Q.  What  elements  are  included  in  a  war 
diary? 

A.  1.  A  march  table,  or  statement  of  the 
operations,  including  an  account  of  the 
weather,  roads,  camp,  health  of  troops, 
etc. 

2.  A  chronological  record  of  events,  in- 
cluding time  and  place  of  receipt  of 
orders  and  messages,  with  a  copy  or 
synopsis  of  their  contents. 

3.  After  an  engagement  the  war  diary 
should  contain  a  report  of  losses  and 
captures  and  be  accompanied  by  a 
sketch  showing  the  positions  of  the  com- 
mand at  important  phases. 

4.  Each  day's  record  will  be  attested  by 
the  adjutant  or  the  commander,  and 
with  copies  of  orders  and  messages,  sent 
and  received,  forwarded  daily  to  the 
next  higher  commander.     (35) 

Q.  How  is  military  information  transmitted? 
A.  1.  By  wire.     (Telegraph,  buzzer,  tele- 
phone.) 

2.  By  visual  signalling.  (Flag,  helio, 
lamp.) 

3.  By  radio.     (Wireless.) 


62 


Night   Operations 


4.  By  messenger.  (Foot,  mounted,  cycle, 
motor  car,  aeroplane.)     (36) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  transmission  of 
messages  by  messengers? 

A.  1.  They  are  inclosed  in  envelopes  and 
properly  addressed. 

2.  When  not  confidential,  they  are  left  un- 
sealed so  that  commanders  along  the 
line  may  read  them. 

3.  On  the  envelope,  is  noted  the  name  of 
the  messenger,  his  time  of  departure 
and  his  rate  of  speed.  Note:  Ordinary 
speed  for  a  mounted  man  means  about 
5  miles  per  hour;  rapid,  about  7  to  8 
miles  per  hour;  urgent,  the  highest 
speed  consistent  with  certainty  of  arrival 
at  destination. 

4.  The  recipient  of  the  message  notes  the 
time  of  receipt  on  the  envelope  and  re- 
turns it  to  the  bearer.     (36) 

Q.  When  there  is  danger  of  messages  falling 
into  unauthorised  hands  what  precau- 
tions are  taken? 

A.  1.  They  may  be  sent  in  cipher. 

2.  They  may  be  sent  by  two  or  more  mes- 
sengers ;  traveling  different  roads  or 
routes. 

3.  Messengers  are  informed  of  the  con- 
tents of  messages. 

Q.  Describe  the  method  employed  in  relaying 
messages? 

A.  When  the  usual  means  of  communication 
cannot  be  established,  or  fail  to  work, 
relays  of  mounted  men  may  become 
necessary.  When  such  lines  are  estab- 
lished, connecting  posts  are  generally 
placed  on  the  roads  at  cross  roads  or 
road  forks,  bridges,  etc.  The  distance 
between  posts  depends  upon  the  rapidity 
of  transmission  desired,  the  number  of 
men  available  for  the  service  and  the 
location  of  suitable  stations.  The  usual 
distance  is  from  5  to  10  miles.  The 
strength  of  posts  varies  from  a  non- 
commissioned officer  and  six  men  to  half 
a  troop.  A  record  of  all  communications 
received  and  transmitted  is  kept.  When 
a  messenger  arrives  at  a  post,  his  mes- 
sage is  turned  over  to  a  member  of  that 
post  and  relayed  on  to  the  next,  the 
former  messenger  returning  to  his 
proper  post.     (36) 

The  Service  of  Security 

Q.  What  elements  does  the  service  of  secur- 
ity embrace? 


A.  All  those  measures  taken  by  a  command 
to  protect  itself  from  observation,  an- 
noyance, or  surprise  by  the  enemy.    (37) 

Q.  How  are  the  various  bodies  of  covering 
troops  employed  in  the  service  of  secur- 
ity designated? 

A.  1.  On  the  march,  these  detachments  are 
called  advance,  flank  and  rear  guards. 
2.  In  camp  or  bivouac,  these  troops  are 
called  outposts.     (37) 

Q.  What  are  the  general  duties  of  covering 
troops? 

A.  1.  To  facilitate  the  advance  of  the  main 
body  by  promptly  driving  off  small 
bodies  of  the  enemy  who  seek  to  harass 
or  delay  it. 

2.  To  remove  obstacles  from  the  line  of 
advance. 

3.  To  repair  roads,  bridges,  etc. 

4.  To  protect  the  main  body  by  preventing 
the  enemy  from  firing  into  them  when  in 
close  formation. 

5.  To  hold  the  enemy  and  thus  enable  the 
main  body  to  deploy  before  coming 
under  effective  fire. 

6.  To  prevent  the  enemy  from  discovering 
strength  and  •  composition  of  the  main 
body. 

7.  In  retreat,  to  fight  delaying  actions  in 
order  to  gain  time  for  the  main  body  to 
make  its  escape  or  to  reorganize  its 
forces.     (37) 

Q.  Describe  the  general  formation  assumed 
by  covering  troops? 

A.  1.  The  cavalry ;  covering  the  front  and  ex- 
tending around  the  flanks. 

2.  A  group  (advance  party  of  the  advance 
gfuard)  or  line  of  groups  (the  outguards 
of  an  outpost)  in  observation. 

3.  A  support  or  line  of  supports ;  whose 
duty  it  is  to  furnish  the  observation  and 
reconnaissance  groups,  and  to  hold  the 
enemy  pending  the  arrival  of  rein- 
forcements. 

4.  A  reserve.     (37) 

Q.  What  elements  with  respect  to  covering 
troops  are  contained  in  an  order  for  the 
movement  of  a  command? 

A.  1.  Explain  the  situation.  Give  all  informa- 
tion of  the  enemy  and  of  our  own  troops. 

2.  Indicate,  in  general  terms,  the  plan  of 
the  commander. 

3.  Detail  the  commander  and  troops  for 
each  covering  detachment. 

4.  Specify  the  route  to  be  taken  and  the 


Night  Operations 


63 


distance  to  be  maintained  between  the 
main  body  and  its  covering  detachments. 
5.  Order  such  special  reconnaissance  as 
the  commander  desires  to  have  made. 
(38) 

Q.  What  proportion  of  a  command  is  detailed 
on  covering  duty? 

A.  The  strength  may  vary  from  one-twentieth 
to  one-third  of  the  command.     (39) 

Q.  What  compliments  are  paid  by  troops  en- 
gaged in  the  service  of  security? 

A.  They  pay  no  compliments.  Individuals 
salute  when  they  address,  or  are  ad- 
dressed by,  a  superior  officer.     (39) 

Q.  What  is  an  advance  guard? 

A.  An  advance  guard  is  a  detachment  of  the 
main  body  which  precedes  and  covers  it 
on  the  march.     (40) 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  an  advance  guard? 

A.  1.  To  guard  against  surprise  and  furnish 
information  through  reconnaissance  to 
the  front  and  flanks. 

2.  To  push  back  small  parties  of  the 
enemy  and  prevent  their  observing,  fir- 
ing upon,  or  delaying  the  advance  of  the 
main  body. 

3.  To  check  the  enemy's  advance  in  force 
long  enough  to  permit  the  main  body  to 
prepare  for  action. 

4.  When  the  enemy  is  encountered  on 
the  defensive,  to  seize  a  good  position 
and  locate  his  lines,  care  being  taken  not 
to  bring  on  a  general  engagement,  un- 
less the  advance  guard  commander  is 
empowered  to  do  so. 

5.  To  remove  obstacles,  repair  the  road, 
and  favor  in  every  way  the  steady  and 
uninterrupted  advance  of  the  main  body. 
(40) 

Q.  What  is  the  strength  of  an  advance  guard? 

A.  One-twentieth  to  one-third  of  the  entire 
force.     (40) 

Q.  What  factors  determine  the  strength  and 
composition  of  the  advance  guard? 

A.  1.  The  larger  the  force,  the  larger  in  pro- 
portion the  advance  guard;  because  it 
takes  a  large  force  relatively  longer  to 
deploy. 

2.  In  large  commands,  it  is  usually  com- 
posed of  all  arms.  The  proportions  de- 
pend upon  the  character  of  the  country, 
the  nature  of  the  enemy  and  his  strength 
and  proximity. 

3.  In   open   country,    the   advance   guard 


will    be    strong    in    cavalry    and    field 
artillery. 

4.  In  swampy  country  and  jungle,  it  may 
be  composed  of  infantry  alone. 

5.  Machine  guns  are  useful  in  holding 
places  of  special  importance. 

6.  Engineers  are  attached  for  pioneer 
work. 

7.  Sanitary  detachments  are  attached  for 
special  work.     (41) 

Q.  What  factors  determine  the  distance  be- 
tween the  advance  guard  and  the  main 
body? 

A.  1.  It  must  be  sufficient  to  prevent  needless 
interruptions  to  the  march  of  the  main 
body. 

2.  The  distance  must  be  such  that  sufficient 
time  will  be  allowed  the  main  body  to 
deploy  for  action. 

3.  It  must  not  be  so  great  that  it  is  im- 
practicable to  support  the  advance  guard. 
(42) 

Q.  What  are   the   elements  of  the  advance 

guard. 
A.  1.  The  advance  cavalry. 

2.  The  support,  from  which  is  thrown  out 
the  advance  party  and  the  covering  de- 
tachments. 

3.  The  reserve,  which  forms  the  fighting 
element  of  the  advance  guard.     (44) 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  advance 
cavalry? 

A.  1.  It  reconnoitres  far  enough  to  the  front 
and  flanks  to  guard  the  column  against 
surprise  by  artillery  fire,  and  to  enable 
timely  information  to  be  sent  to  the  ad- 
vance guard  commander. 
2.  If  preceded  by  independent  cavalry,  the 
advance  cavalry  maintains  connection 
therewith.  If  not  preceded  by  independ- 
ent cavalry,  it  pushes  well  out  and  en- 
deavors to  find  the  enemy,  performing  to 
a  limited  extent  the  functions  of  inde- 
pendent cavalry.     (45) 

Q.  What  is  the  strength  of  the  support? 

A.  From  one-fourth  to  one-half  of  the  ad- 
vance guard. 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  advance 
party? 

A  It  supplements  the  work  of  the  advance 
cavalry,  reconnoitring  to  the  front 
and  flanks  to  guard  the  support  against 
surprise  by  effective  rifle  fire.     (46) 

Q.  What  is  the  point  of  the  advance  guard? 


64 


Night   Operations 


A.  It  is  a  patrol  that  precedes  the  advance 
party  at  a  distance  of  about  150  to  200 
yards.  It  generally  consists  of  one 
squad  under  an  officer  or  experienced 
sergeant     (46) 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  support  com- 
mander f 

A.  1.  He  marches  with  the  advance  party,  or 
goes  wherever  he  is  needed. 

2.  He  sees  that  guides  are  left  at  towns 
and  cross  roads. 

3.  He  sees  that  necessary  repairs  are  made 
to  roads,  bridges,  etc. 

4.  He  sees  that  information  of  the  enemy 
is  promptly  transmitted  to  the  advance 
guard  commander. 

5.  He  sees  that  the  reconnoitring  parties, 
sent  out  from  the  support,  do  their  work 
efficiently.     (46) 

Q.  What  modifications  are  made  in  the  nor- 
mal formations  of  an  advance  guard 
when  it  is  covering  a  small  command 
only. 

A.  1.  A  company  or  troop  usually  sends  for- 
ward only  a  point. 

2.  A  battalion  or  squadron  sends  forward 
an  advance  party. 

3.  A  battalion  or  squadron  at  war  strength 
would  have  an  advance  party  of  one 
company  or  troop. 

4.  The  advance  guard  of  a  regiment  would 
be  one  battalion  or  squadron. 

5.  When  the  advance  guard  is  less  than  a 
battalion  or  squadron,  the  reserve  is 
omitted.     (49) 

Q.  What  modifications  are  made  in  the  ad- 
vance guard  covering  the  advance  of  a 
cavalry  command? 

A.  The  formation  is  similar  to  that  of  the 
infantry  or  mixed  command,  except  that 
the  distances  between  the  various  ele- 
ments are  much  greater.     (50) 

Q.  What  are  leading  troops? 

A.  In  a  retreat  the  column  is  preceded  by  a 
body  of  troops  designated  "  leading 
troops." 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  and  functions  of 
leading  troops? 

A.  1.  To  clear  the  road  of  obstacles  and 
facilitate  the  withdrawal  of  the  com- 
mand. 
2.  They  afford  protection  against  gueril- 
las or  small  parties  that  have  succeeded 
in  getting  around  the  command. 


3.  If  the  rear  is  seriously  threatened,  the 
leading  troops  march  practically  in  ad- 
vance formation  and  have  the  same  role. 
(52) 

Q.  What  is  a  Hank  guard? 

A.  A  covering  detachment  sent  out  to  protect 
the  flank  of  a  column  of  troops  on  the 
march.     (53) 

Q.  What  formation  does  a  Hank  guard 
assume? 

A.  The  normal  formation  of  a  column  of 
troops  on  the  march.  It  throws  out  an 
advance  guard,  also  covering  detach- 
ments on  the  exposed  flank.     (53) 

Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  a  flank  guard? 

A.  Their  duties  are  similar  to  those  of  the 
advance  guard.  They  maintain  constant 
communication  with  the  troops  of  the 
main  body  and  keep  abreast  of  the  unit 
from  which  they  are  sent  out.  They 
cover  exposed  points  to  protect  the  pas- 
sage of  the  main  body.     (53) 

Q.  Under  what  circumstances  does  the  flank 
guard  become  of  great  importance? 

A.  When  the  main  body  is  executing  a  flank 
march.     (54) 

Q,  What  factors  determine  the  strength  and 
composition  of  a  rear  guard? 

A.  1.  The  nature  of  the  country  and  the 
strength  and  character  of  the  pursuing 
force. 
2.  Machine  guns  are  especially  useful  in 
covering  the  crossings  of  rivers  and  the 
passage  of  defiles.     (56) 

Q.  From  what  troops  is  the  rear  guard 
usually  taken? 

A.  From  those  who  have  had  previous  local 
successes,  or  have  suffered  little  loss  and 
are  comparatively  fresh.     (56) 

Q.  What  is  the  general  formation  of  a  rear 
guard? 

A.  The  formation  is  similar  to  that  of  an 
advance  guard  reversed.  Its  elements 
are  the  rear  cavalry ;  the  support,  di- 
vided into  the  support  proper  and  the 
rear  party ;  and  the  reserve,  which  is  the 
largest  body  and  marches  nearest  to  the 
rear  of  the  main  body.     (57) 

Q.  What  is  an  outpost? 

A.  A  body  of  troops  sent  out  to  cover  the 
front  and  flanks  of  a  body  of  troops 
when  halted,  to  protect  it  from  surprise, 
and  delay  the  enemy  long  enough  for 
it  to  prepare  for  action.     (60) 


Night    Operations 


65 


Q.  Upon  what  does  the  size  and  disposition 

of  the  outpost  depend? 
A.  The    size    of   the    whole   command ;    the 

proximity  of  the  enemy  and  the  situation 

with  respect  to  him;  and  the  nature  of 

the  terrain.     (60) 
Q.  What  is  the  size  of  outpost  for  the  various 

units? 
A.  1.  For  a  single  company  in  bivouac,  a  few 

sentinels  and  patrols  will  suffice. 

2.  For  a  battalion,  a  company. 

3.  For  a  regiment,  a  battalion. 

4.  For  a  brigade,  a  regiment. 

Note. — The  outpost  should  be  no  stronger 
than  is  necessary  to  provide  reasonable  secur- 
ity.   The  integrity  of  units  is  preserved  when- 
ever practicable.     (60) 
p.  What  troops  are  generally  detailed  for  the 

outpost? 
A.  At  the  end  of  the  day's  march  on  the  ad- 
vance,   the     advance    guard    generally 
forms  the  outpost. 
In  retreat,   the  main  body  furnishes  the 
outpost  for  the  night.     (61) 
Q.  What  are   the  functions  of   the  several 

arms  on  outpost  duty? 
A.  1.  Infantry:  The  infantry  is  charged  with 
the  duty  of  local  observation,  especially 
at  night,  and  with  resisting  the  enemy 
long  enough  for  the  main  body  to  pre- 
pare for  action.  It  conducts  the  local 
reconnaissance  in  front  of  the  outpost 
lines. 

2.  Cavalry :  The  cavalry  is  charged  with 
the  duty  of  reconnaissance  in  front  and 
to  the  flanks  of  the  outpost  position. 

3.  Artillery:  Artillery  is  useful  to  the  out- 
post when  it  can  be  posted  so  that  its  fire 
can  sweep  defiles  or  large  open  spaces 
and  when  it  commands  positions  that 
may  be  occupied  by  hostile  artillery. 

4.  Machine  guns  are  useful  to  command 
approaches  and  check  sudden  advances 
of  the  enemy. 

5.  Engineers  are  attached  to  the  outpost  to 
assist  in  laying  out  and  constructing  the 
defensive  works  connected  therewith, 
clearing  the  field  of  fire,  and  preparing 
lateral   and   rearward    communications. 

Q.  What  is  the  distribution  of  outpost 
troops? 

A.  1,  The  reserve,  constituting  the  main  body 
of  the  outpost,  is  held  at  some  central 
point  under  the  direct  command  of  the 


outpost  commander,  so  that  it  can  read- 
ily support  any  of  the  troops  in  front,  or 
hold  a  rallying  position  upon  which  they 
may  retire.  Its  strength  may  be  from 
one-fourth  to  two-thirds  of  the  entire 
outpost. 

2.  The  supports  constitute  a  line  of  sup- 
porting and  resisting  detachments,  vary- 
ing in  size  from  a  half  a  company  to  a 
battalion.  They  furnish  troops  for  the 
outguards,  and  are  generally,  though  not 
necessarily,  posted  on  the  line  of  re- 
sistance of  the  outpost. 

3.  The  outguards  constitute  the  line  of 
small  detachments  most  advanced  to  the 
front.  They  are  posted  along  the  line 
of  observations,  and  furnish  the  sentinel 
posts  of  the  outpost. 

4.  The  advance  cavalry  reconnoitres  in 
advance  of  the  line  of  observation  by 
day  and  is  withdrawn  behind  the  lines 
at  night.     (64)   (65) 

Q.  How  are  the  supports  numbered? 

A.  They  are  numbered  consecutively  from 
right  to  left:  as  Support  No.  1,  Support 
No.  2,  etc.     (66) 

Q.  Where  are  the  suports  usually  posted? 

A.  On  or  near  a  road  leading  towards  the 
enemy.     (66) 

Q.  How  are  outguards  classified? 

A.  Pickets,  sentry  squads  and  cossack  posts. 
(67) 

Q.  What  is  a  picket? 

A.  A  group  consisting  of  two  or  more  squads 
ordinarily  not  more  than  half  a  com- 
pany— posted  in  the  line  of  outguards  to 
cover  a  given  sector.     (68) 

Q.  Where  are  pickets  usually  posted? 

A.  At  the  most  important  points  on  the  line 
of  outguards,  for  example,  at  road  forks 
or  cross  roads.     (68) 

Q.  Upon  what  does  the  strength  of  the  picket 
'depend? 

A.  The  number  of  small  groups  that  it  has 
to  furnish  in  order  to  cover  its  sector, 
and  the  amount  of  patrolling  that  has  to 
be  carried  on.     (68) 

Q.  What  is  a  sentry  squad? 

A.  A  sentry  squad  is  a  squad  posted  in  ob- 
servation. It  posts  a  double  sentinel  in 
observation,  the  remaining  men  resting 
nearby  and  furnishing  reliefs  for  the 
sentinels.  In  some  cases,  it  may  be  re- 
quired to  furnish  a  patrol.     (69) 

Q.  What  is  a  cossack  post? 


66 


Night  Operations 


A.  It  is  an  observation  group  composed  of 
four  men,  similar  to  the  sentry  squad; 
it  posts  a  single  sentinel.  The  cossack 
post  commander  and  three  privates  fur- 
nish the  reliefs  for  the  single  sentinel 
post.     (70) 

Q.  What  use  is  made  of  patrols  in  connec- 
tion with  outpost  service? 

A.  Instead  of  using  outguards  along  the  en- 
tire front  of  observation,  part  of  this 
front  may  be  covered  by  patrols  only. 
These  should  be  used  to  cover  such 
sections  of  the  front  as  can  be  crossed 
by  the  enemy  only  with  difficulty  and 
over  which  he  is  not  likely  to  attempt  a 
crossing  after  dark.     (73) 

Q.  What  resistance  is  required  to  be  made  by 
the  several  elements  of  the  outpost? 

A.  Each  successive  element  of  the  outpostmust 
afford  sufficient  resistence  to  delay  the 
enemy  the  length  of  time  necessary  for 
the  next  succeeding  body  to  prepare  to 
receive  him.     (74) 

Q.  How  is  connection  maintained  between 
the  several  elements  of  the  outpost? 

A.  By  patrols.     (74) 

Q.  What  are  detached  posts? 

A.  They  are  detachments  sent  out  from  the 
reserve  to  occupy  positions  of  impor- 
tance that  are  not  included  in  the  gen- 
eral line  assigned  to  the  supports.  In 
some  instances  they  may  be  sent  out 
from  the  main  body  to  cover  points  not 
included  in  the  general  outpost  line. 
(75) 

Q.  What  reference  to  the  outpost  is  con- 
tained in  the  halt  order  issued  by  the 
commander  of  a  force? 

A.  A  paragraph: 

1.  Detailing  the  troops  of  outpost  duty. 

2.  Assigning  an  outpost  commander. 

3.  Designating  the  general  line  to  be  oc- 
cupied. 

4.  When  practicable,  points  of   the  gen- 
eral line  to  be  held  in  case  of  attack. 

07) 

Q.  What  elements  are  included  in  the  order 
of  the  outpost  commander? 

A.  1.  All  information  of  the  enemy  and  our 
own  troops  that  is  necessary  for  the 
proper  guidance  of  subordinates. 
2.  The  designation  of  the  troops  to  con- 
stitute the  supports  and  the  detailing  of 
a  commander  for  each. 


3.  The  assignment  of  the  sector  that  each 
support  is  to  cover. 

4.  The  detail  of  troops  and  commanders 
for  all  detached  posts. 

5.  Orders  for  any  special  reconnaissance 
that  it  is  desired  be  made. 

6.  The  location  and  disposition  of  the 
reserve. 

7.  The  disposition  of  the  trains  if  they  are 
ordered  to  join  the  outpost  troops. 

8.  The  place  where  information  is  to  be 
sent.     {77) 

Q.  Describe  in  detail  the  method  employed 
in  posting  the  outpost. 

A.  1.  The  commander  of  the  whole  force 
issues  his  halt  order.  Based  on  this  the 
outpost  commander  issues  his  order. 

2.  The  reserve  is  marched  directly  to  it« 
designated  position,  maintaining  connec- 
tion with  the  main  body,  the  supports 
and  the  detached  posts  that  may  have 
been  sent  out  from  it. 

3.  The  supports  march  to  their  positions, 
using  the  necessary  covering  detach- 
ments. Each  support  sends  forward  a  de- 
tachment to  cover  the  posting  of  the 
outguards  along  the  sector  that  it  is  to 
occupy.  These  detachments  may  be  small 
patrols  or  a  line  of  skirmishers.  The 
support  commander  details  the  troops 
for  each  outguard  and  assigns  a  com- 
mander, defines  its  location  and  sector 
of  the  front  to  be  covered.  Posts  senti- 
nels at  the  post  of  the  support.  The 
necessary  reconnoitring  patrols  are  sent 
out.  Connection  is  established  with  the 
reserve,  the  adjoining  supports,  and  all 
the  elements  of  the  support  itself. 

4.  Each  outguard  is  marched  to  its  desig- 
nated location  where  sentinels  are  posted 
to  cover  the  front  of  the  sector  assigned 
to  the  outguard.  Connection  is  gained 
with  adjoining  outguards  and  sentinel 
posts  and  with  the  support.  The  senti- 
nels are  given  their  instructions,  which 
include  the  location  and  direction  of  the 
enemy,  the  number  of  the  post,  the  posi- 
tion of  the  adjoining  sentinel  posts  and 
outguards,  the  names  of  all  towns,  roads, 
rivers  and  principal  features  in  sight. 

5.  The  commander  of  each  element  of  the 
outpost  explains  the  military  situation 
to  the  men  of  his  command  in  sufficient 
detail  to  enable  all  of  them  to  act  in- 
telligently under  the  circumstances.    As 


Night  Operations 


67 


soon  as  the  several  elements  are  posted 
the  commander  conducts  an  inspection, 
makes  any  changes  that  may  be  necessary 
and  renders  a  report  of  his  disposi- 
tions to  his  next  superior.  Such  in- 
trenching and  field  works  are  con- 
structed as  the  situation  demands. 
(78-79-80) 

Q.  What  are  the  hours  of  special  danger  on 
the  outposts? 

A.  Evening  and  before  dawn.  The  enemy 
may  attack  late  in  the  day  in  order  to 
establish  himself  on  captured  ground  by 
intrenching  during  the  night ;  or  he  may 
send  forward  troops  during  the  night 
under  the  cover  of  darkness  in  order  to 
make  a  strong  attack  at  early  dawn. 

Q.  At  what  hour  is  the  outpost  generally 
relieved? 


A.  At  daylight.  This  makes  a  double 
strength  on  the  outpost  line  at  the  hour 
of  greatest  danger. 

Q.  What  is  an  examining  post? 

A.  A  small  detachment  under  the  command 
of  an  officer  or  noncommissioned 
officer,  stationed  at  some  convenient 
point  to  examine  strangers,  receive 
flags  of  truce  brought  in  by  outguards 
or  patrols. 

Q.  Under  what  circumstances  are  examining 
posts  used? 

A.  1.  When  the  outguards  do  not  speak  the 
language  of  the  country  or  the  enemy. 

2.  When  preparations  are  being  made  for 
a  movement  and  strict  scrutiny  at  the 
outguards  has  been  ordered. 

3.  At  sieges,  whether,  in  attack  or  defense. 
(83) 


Marches  and  Convoys 


Q,  Define  a  successful  march? 

A.  A  successful  march,  whether  in  peace  or 
war,  is  one  that  places  the  troops  at 
their  destination  at  the  proper  mo- 
ment and  in  the  best  possible  condition. 
(96) 

Q.  Upon  what  does  the  success  of  a  march 
depend? 

A.  Upon  the  skill  with  which  it  is  conducted, 
careful  preparation,  strict  discipline, 
and  the  observance  of  march  sanitation. 
(96) 

Q.  What  are  the  general  principles  govern- 
ing the  conduct  of  marches? 

A.  1.  While  conforming  to  other  require- 
ments, marches  are  conducted  so  as 
to  reduce  to  a  minimum  the  hardships 
on  the  troops. 

2.  When  possible  ample  notice  is  given  so 
that  preparations  may  be  made  without 
haste. 

3.  The  march  is  habitually  in  route  order. 

4.  Troops  are  informed  of  the  length  of 
halts,  so  that  they  can  take  full  advan- 
tage of  the  same. 

5.  The  men  are  not  kept  under  arms 
longer  than  is  necessary,  nor  required 
to  carry  heavy  burdens  when  trans- 
portation is  available. 

6.  Special  care  is  paid  to  the  feet  of  the 
men  and  the  hoofs  and  backs  of  ani- 
mals. 

7.  In  prolonged  marches,  at  least  one  day 
in  seven  should  be  a  day  of  rest. 

8.  A  forced  march  is  never  undertaken 
unless  the  situation  requires  it.     (96) 

Q.  What  compliments  are  paid  by  troops  on 
the  march? 

A.  As  a  rule,  troops  on  the  march  pay  no 
compliments ;  individuals  salute  when 
they  address,  or  are  addressed  by  a  su- 
perior officer.     (96) 

Q.  What  preparations  for  a  march  devolve 
upon  the  commander  of  a  force? 


A.  1.  That  the  men  and  animals  are  in  fit 
condition,  and  that  they  are  properly 
equipped. 

2.  That  all  trains  accompanying  the  com- 
mand are  loaded  as  prescribed. 

3.  That  proper  measures  have  been  made 
for  the  replenishment  of  supplies. 

4.  That  necessary  arrangements  have  been 
made  for  the  care  and  evacuation  of 
the  sick  and  wounded.     (97) 

Q.  When  units  are  camped  some  distance 
apart,  how  is  the  march  column 
formed? 

A.  The  column  is  formed  by  the  successive 
arrival  of  the  fractions  at  an  initial  or 
starting  point  which,  as  a  rule,  is  lo- 
cated in  the  direction  of  the  proposed 
march.  The  commander  fixes  the  ini- 
tial point  after  considering  the  position 
of  the  troops  and  the  location  of  the 
roads  by  which  they  can  join  the  col- 
umn. He  prescribes  the  hour  by  which 
the  leading  fraction  clears  the  initial 
point,  and  if  necessary  the  routes  to  be 
follovv'ed  in  reaching  it.  To  prevent 
needless  marching,  he  may  designate 
special  initial  points  for  various  units 
of  the  command.     (98) 

Q.  What  road  space  is  occupied  by  the  troops 
of  the  several  arms? 

A.  1.  Foot  troops  in  column  of  squads,  two 
men  per  yard. 

2.  Cavalry  in  column  of  fours,  one  man 
per  yard. 

3.  Guns,  caissons  or  wagons,  20  yards. 

4.  Auto  trucks,  12  yards.  (This  is  be- 
lieved to  be  too  little  distance,  Ed.) 

Q.  What  factors  govern  the  distribution  of 

troops  in  a  column  on  the  march? 
A.  1.  Tactical   considerations,   which   in  the 

presence  of  the  enemy  are  paramount. 
2.  By  the  rule  requiring  the  hardships  of 

troops   to  be  reduced  to   a   minimum. 

(99) 


Night  Operations 


69 


Q.  What  rule  is  followed  in  designating  the 
troops  to  lead  in  the  column  of  march? 

A.  The  order  of  brigades  in  divisions,  regi- 
ments in  brigades,  battalions  or  squad- 
rons in  regiments,  and  company  units 
in  battalions  and  squadrons  is  generally 
changed  from  day  to  day — the  leading 
-unit  one  day  taking  its  place  at  the  rear 
on  the  following  day.     (99) 

Q.  What  rules  are  prescribed  for  troops 
marching  on  roads  f 

A.  1.  They  keep  to  the  right  of  the  road, 
leaving  the  left  free. 

2.  When  roads  are  narrow,  space  should 
be  left  for  messengers  to  pass  freely 
up  and  down  the  column. 

3.  When  roads  are  soft  with  mud  or 
heavy  with  sand  or  very  dusty,  it  may 
be  advisable  to  divide  the  column  longi- 
tudinally, thus  permitting  the  men  and 
animals  to  pick  their  way,  leaving  the 
middle  of  the  road  clear. 

4.  Straggling  and  undue  lengthening  of 
the  column  is  not  permitted.     (99) 

Q.  What  is  the  formation  of  the  route  col- 
umn for  the  various  arms  of  the  serv- 
ice? 

A.  1.  Infantry,  column  of  squads,  or  column 
of  twos  when  necessary. 

2.  Cavalry,  column  of  fours  on  good 
roads  or  when  a  compact  formation  is 
necessary,  otherwise  in  column  of  twos, 

3.  Artillery,  section  column,  or  in  double 
section  column  if  the  width  of  the  road 
permits.      (99) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  time  for  starting 
a  march? 

A.  1.  As  a  rule,  foot  troops  do  not  start  be- 
fore broad  daylight. 
2.  Mounted  troops,  when  practicable,  do 
not  start  until  an  hour  after  broad  day- 
light. (Note:  Tactical  considerations 
are  always  paramount.)     (1(X)) 

Q.  What  factors  affect  the  rate  of  march  of 
troops? 

A.  1.  The  length  of  the  march  to  be  made. 

2.  The  size  of  the  command. 

3.  The  condition  of  the  troops. 

4.  The  condition  of  the  roads.  (Sandy, 
rough,  muddy  and  slippery  roads  re- 
duce the  rate  of  march.) 

5.  The  state  of  the  weather.  (Great 
heat,  strong  head  winds  and  storms  re- 
duce  the    rate.) 

6.  The  topography  of  the  country.  If 
hills  are  to  be  climbed  or  swampy  coun- 


try is  to  be  crossed,  or  defiles  passed, 
liberal  allowances  must  be  made  in 
time  calculations.    (101) 

Q.  Under  the  varying  conditions  of  service, 
what  are  the  rates  of  march  for  infan- 
try? 

A.  1.  For  drill  it  is  100  yards  per  minute  or 
3.4  miles  per  hour. 

2.  On  the  road,  the  maximum  to  be 
counted  upon  is  88  yards  per  minute, 
or  3  miles  per  hour ;  including  halts  2j4 
to  2^4  miles  per  hour. 

3.  Under  ordinary  conditions,  the  rate  of 
infantry  columns  may  be  taken  at  2% 
to  2y2  miles  per  hour. 

4.  For  small  bodies,  the  average  day's 
march  is  15  miles;  for  large  bodies  12 
miles  is  all  that  can  be  counted  upon. 
Small  commands  of  seasoned  infantry 
marching  on  good  roads  in  cool  weather 
can  average  more  than  20  miles  a  day. 
(101) 

Q.  Under  the  varying  conditions  of  the  serv- 
ice, what  are  the  rates  of  march  for 
cavalry? 

A.  1.  The  walk,  4  miles,  the  trot  8  miles,  and 
the  gallop  12  miles  per  hour.  The  aver- 
age walk  of  a  horse  is  at  the  rate  of  a 
mile  in  16  minutes  or  3^  miles  per 
hour ;  the  average  trot  a  mile  in  8  min- 
utes or  7y2  miles  an  hour. 

2.  In  the  field,  the  usual  gait  is  the  walk 
which,  including  halts,  make  about  3J4 
to  ZYi  miles  an  hour. 

3.  The  average  march  of  cavalry,  after 
men  and  animals  are  hardened,  is  25 
miles  a  day.     (101) 

Q.  Under  the  varying  conditions  of  the  serv- 
ice, what  are  the  rates  of  march  of  ar- 
tillery? 

A.  The  daily  march  of  the  field  artillery  is 
the  same  as  that  of  the  command  of 
which  it  forms  a  part;  if  alone,  it  cov- 
ers from  15  to  25  miles.  The  rate  of 
horse  artillery  is  the  same  as  that  of 
the  cavalry  to  which  it  is  attached. 
(101) 

Q.  What  is  the  rate  of  m^trch  of  wagon 
trains? 

A.  The  rate  of  march  of  wagon  trains  varies 
with  the  condition  of  the  draft  animals, 
the  load,  the  length  of  the  column,  and 
the  condition  of  the  roads.  While  large 
mules  drawing  light  loads  on  good 
roads  can  cover  nearly  four  miles  an 
hour,  in  long  columns  a  rate  of  two 


70 


Night  Operations 


miles  an  hour  is  all  that  can  be  ex- 
pected. The  daily  march  of  a  wagon 
train  is  about  that  of  infantry.     (101) 

Q.  What  is  the  average  load  for  a  pack 
mule? 

A.  About  250  pounds. 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  halts  of  a  column 
of  troops  on  the  march? 

A.  The  first  halt  is  made  after  the  troops 
have  marched  about  45  minutes,  and  is 
about  15  minutes  long;  after  this,  the 
troops  are  halted  10  minutes  in  each 
hour,  that  is,  they  march  50  minutes 
and  halt  10  minutes.  In  very  hot 
weather,  the  halts  may  be  more  fre- 
quent and  for  longer  periods. 
For  cavalry  the  hourly  halts  are  shorter 

— 5  minutes. 
For  artillery  the  hourly  halts  are  from 

5  to  10  minutes. 
When  the  day's  march  will  run  well  into 
the  afternoon,  a  halt  of  about  an  hour 
at  noon  time  is  advantageous.     (102) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  selection  of  places 
for  haltsf 

A.  1.  They  should  not  be  made  in  villages  or 
towns  where  the  object  of  the  halt 
would  be  defeated. 
2.  Places  for  long  halts  should  be  selected 
with  care;  wood,  water,  grass,  dry 
ground  and  shade  are  desirable  fea- 
tures.    (102) 

Q.  How  may  troops  be  marched  so  as  to 
avoid  the  mid-day  heat  in  hot  weather 
or  in  the  tropics? 

A.  If  the  march  is  long,  the  command  may 
make  an  earlier  start,  or  it  may  rest  for 
three  or  four  hours  during  the  hottest 
part  of  the  day  and  finish  the  march  in 
the  evening.  As  a  general  rule,  it  is 
undesirable  to  arrive  at  a  strange  place 
after  nightfall,  or  even  late  in  the  aft- 
ernoon.    (102) 

Q.  What  general  rules  govern  the  passage 
of  troops  through  deiiles,  across 
bridges,  etc? 

A.  1.  The  troops  in  rear  are  notified  of  the 
minimum  length  of  the  delay  and  con- 
duct themselves  as  during  a  halt. 
2.  Where  a  reduction  of  front  is  neces- 
sary, every  precaution  is  taken  to  pre- 
vent the  interruption  of  troops  in  the 
rear.  If  the  distances  are  not  sufficient 
to  prevent  check,  units  are  allowed  to 
overlap. 


3.  If  practicable  streams  are  crossed  at 
two  or  more  places. 

4.  In  passing  through  short  defiles,  the 
pace  may  be  accelerated. 

5.  If  a  company  unit  is  delayed  while 
crossing  an  obstacle,  the  head  slackens 
the  pace  or  halts  until  all  of  that  unit 
has  passed ;  it  then  resumes  its  place 
in  the  column,  increasing  the  pace  if 
necessary.     (103) 

Q.  What  precautions  are  taken  prior  to  the 
passage  of  troops  over  dangerous 
places? 

A.  A  careful  examination  is  made  of  fords, 
boggy  places,  bridges  of  a  doubtful 
character,  ice,  etc.,  before  attempting 
to  cross. 
When  roads  lead  through  swamps  or 
quicksand,  or  across  streams  with 
treacherous  bottoms,  their  limits  are 
marked  with  stakes  or  bushes,  or 
warnings  are  placed  at  dangerous 
points.  At  night  lanterns  are  hung 
from  the  stakes,  and  a  fire  is  built  or  a 
lantern  hung  from  a  stake  to  mark  the 
landing.     (103) 

Q.  What  precautions  are  taken  when  troops 
cross  fords? 

A.  1.  When  the  current  is  strong  and  the 
water  deep,  foot  troops  cross  on  as 
broad  a  front  as  possible,  the  men 
marching  abreast  and  holding  hands. 
They  should  not  look  at  the  water,  but 
at  the  opposite  shore. 
2.  If  the  ford  is  wide  enough,  mounted 
troops  may  cross  at  the  same  time  up- 
stream, thus  breaking  the  force  of  the 
current.     (103) 

Q.  When  a  passage  of  a  stream  is  made  in 
boats,  what  rules  govern? 

A.  1.  Persons  operating  the  ferry  are  inter- 
fered with  as  little  as  possible. 

2.  The  men  enter  the  boats  singly  at  the 
bow  and  move  gradually  towards  the 
stern. 

3.  The  men  retain  the  places  assigned  to 
them,  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the 
handling  of  the  boat. 

4.  In  small  boats,  and  where  the  water  is 
rough,  they  are  required  to  sit  down, 
and  in  case  the  passage  is  dangerous, 
they  may  be  required  to  remove  equip- 
ments.    (103) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  ferrying  of  ani- 
mals across  a  stream? 


Night  Operations 


71 


A.  1.  Horses  are  loaded  one  at  a  time.  When 
there  is  room  for  a  single  row  only, 
they  are  alternate,  heads  and  tails ;  if  in 
two  rows  they  face  inward. 
2.  If  a  horse  falls  into  the  water  he  is 
turned  loose.     (103) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  supply  of  drinking 
•  water  for  the  men  on  the  march  f 

A.  1.  Sources  of  water  supply  are  examined 
by  experts  and  marked  good  or  bad. 
In  countries  infected  with  cholera  or 
other  injurious  bacteria  this  action  is 
imperative. 

2.  Soldiers  should  be  trained  to  an  eco- 
nomical use  of  water,  and  should  keep  a 
small  supply  in  their  canteens  until 
there  is  opportunity  to  replenish  it. 

3.  If  water  is  plentiful,  the  men  may 
drink  often,  but  only  a  small  quantity 
at  a  time. 

4.  Commanders  will  furnish  the  men 
ample  opportunity  for  replenishing 
their  canteens.  This  is  done  by  order 
and  not  by  straggling  from  the  com- 
mand. 

5.  In  certain  cases,  the  advance  guard  may 
require  the  inhabitants  to  place  water 
in  vessels  along  the  line  of  march  for 
the  convenient  use  of  the  troops. 

6.  On  long  marches,  through  country  defi- 
cient in  water,  or  where  the  water  is 
bad,  it  may  be  necessary  to  carry  a  sup- 
ply in  wagons.    (104) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  supply  of  drinking 
water  for  the  animals  on  the  march? 

A.  The  watering  of  cavalry  horses  on  the 
march  depends  largely  upon  the  facil- 
ities available.  In  hot  weather,  or  if 
nothing  is  known  of  the  water  supply 
for  the  day's  march,  the  horses  are 
watered  before  leaving  the  camp.  Good 
opportunities  on  the  road  for  watering 
should  not  be  neglected.  To  avoid  de- 
lay, as  many  troops  as  possible  are 
watered  at  the  same  time.  As  the  head 
of  the  column  approaches  a  place  suit- 
able for  watering,  the  several  units  are 
conducted  to  the  different  watering 
places.     (104) 

Q.  What  precautions  are  taken  for  the  Pro- 
tection of  troops  against  hot  weather 
on  the  march  f 

A.  1.  When  practicable,  halting  places  are  se- 
lected where  there  is  shade  and  free 
circulation  of  air,  and  the  men  are  cau- 
tioned against  drinking  too  much 
water. 


2.  Green  leaves,  or  a  moist  handkerchief, 
in  the  hat,  afford  relief  from  the  hot 
rays  of  the  sun. 

3.  If  the  men  are  overheated,  care  is  taken 
to  prevent  them  from  being  chilled  by 
exposure  to  cool  winds  or  drafts.  (104) 

Q.  How  are  marches  classified? 
A.  1.  Marches  in  peace: 

1.  Marches  in  changing  station. 

2.  Practice  marches. 
2.  Marches  in  campaign. 

1.  Concentration  marches. 

2.  Marches   in   the  presence   of    the 

enemy. 

3.  Forced  marches. 

4.  Night  marches.     (107) 

Q.  When  change  of  station  is  made  by 
marching,  what  elements  does  the  daily 
march  order  contain? 

A.  1.  Distribution  of  troops. 

2.  Time  of  starting. 

3.  Location  of  camping  places. 

4.  Service  calls.     (108) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  conduct  of  the 
march  in  changing  station? 

A.  1.  The  distances  between  the  elements  of 
the  column  may  be  materially  increased. 

2.  In  wet  weather  the  mounted  troops 
may  be  required  to  follow  the  foot 
troops.  In  going  through  high  vegeta- 
tion or  snow  the  mounted  troops  may 
be  required  to  precede  the  foot  troops 
to  break  the  way. 

3.  Field  trains  may  be  permitted  to  fol- 
low immediately  in  rear  of  their  regi- 
ments and  supply  trains  may  be  placed 
so  as  to  facilitate  issues.     (108) 

Q.  What  are  the  purposes  of  practice 
marches? 

A.  1.  That  of  hardening  the  men  and  animals 
and  keeping  them  in  proper  physical 
condition. 
2.  That  of  instructing  officers  and  men  in 
duties  incident  to  a  campaign — ^march- 
ing, camping,  cooking,  etc. — and  the 
principles  of  tactics,  including  the 
service  of  information  and  security. 
(109) 

Q.  For  what  purposes  are  concentration 
marches  made? 

A.  To  assemble  at  a  certain  time  and  place 
bodies  of  troops  from  different  local- 
ities.    (110) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  columns  of 
troops  meet  on  the  march? 


72 


Night  Operations 


A.  1.  A  column  of  troops  on  the  march 
should  not  be  cut  by  another. 

2.  If  the  heads  of  two  columns  meet  at  a 
distance  from  the  enemy,  the  senior 
commander  has  the  right  of  way;  if 
near  the  enemy  the  senior  determines 
the  action  to  be  taken. 

3.  If  a  column  in  march  overtakes  another 
at  a  halt,  it  may  pass  on,  provided  the 
commander  be  senior,  or  the  other  com- 
mander gives  his  consent.     (110) 

Q.  What  considerations  control  the  march 
of  troops  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy? 

A.  Tactical  considerations.     (Ill) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  conduct  of  the 
march  of  troops  in  the  presence  of  the 
enemy  f 

A.  1.  The  order  of  march  of  the  main  body 
is  determined  by  the  contemplated  em- 
ployment of  the  troops. 

2.  When  contact  with  the  enemy  is  prob- 
able, columns  are  closed  up  on  the 
march  on  broad  fronts. 

3.  Communication  is  maintained  between 
the  columns  on  parallel  roads. 

4.  All  impedimenta  not  necessary  in  the 
conflict  is  kept  in  the  rear. 

5.  If  a  part  of  a  unit  is  assigned  to  the 
advance  guard  the  remaining  part  of 
that  unit  marches  at  the  head  of  the 
main  body.     (Ill) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  location  of  the  ar- 
tillery in  the  column  when  a  march  is 
conducted  near  the  enemy  f 

A.  1.  During  the  advance,  in  order  to  expe- 
dite the  entry  of  the  artillery  into  ac- 
tion, it  is  generally  near  the  head  of 
the  main  body,  sufficient  infantry  lead- 
ing to  insure  proper  protection. 
2.  If  there  is  danger  to  the  flanks  from 
small  bodies  of  the  enemy,  the  artillery 
may  be  broken  into  columns  not  longer 
than  a  regiment ;  it  then  marches  like 
a  convoy  with  infantry  in  front,  in  or 
near  the  center,  and  at  the  rear.     (Ill) 

Q.  Outline  the  disposition  of  the  troops  of  a 
division  column  marching  on  one  road? 

A.  Advance  Guard : 

Troops 

One  brigade  of  Infantry. 
One  regiment  cavalry. 
One  battalion  field  artillery. 
One  company  engineers. 
Detachment  signal  troops. 
Detachment  sanitary  troops. 


Dispositions : 

Independent  cavalry:  one  regiment  less 
one  squadron,  proceed  several  miles 
to  the  front. 

Advance  cavalry :  one  squadron.  Point 
and  flanking  patrols.  Communica- 
tion maintained  with  independent 
cavalry. 

Support:  one  regiment  infantry  and 
mounted  detachment  of  engineers. 
The  support  sends  forward  an  ad- 
vance party  of  one  company  about 
5(X)  yards,  and  this,  in  turn,  is  pre- 
ceded by  a  point. 

The  Reserve,  in  order  of  march:  one 
battalion  infantry,  one  battalion  ar- 
tillery, two  battalions  infantry,  one 
regiment  infantry,  one  company  en- 
gineers (less  mounted  detachment), 
one  ambulance  company. 

Main  Body,  in  order  of  march : 
1   regiment  infantry. 
1  battalion  field  artillery. 

1  regiment  field  artillery. 

2  brigades  infantry  (less  1  regiment). 
Engineers. 

Signal  troops. 
Artillery  combat  trains. 
Trains.     (Ill) 

Q.  Who  furnishes  protection  to  the  Held 
trains? 

A.  The  men  on  duty  with  the  train ;  convales- 
cents and  other  non-effectives ;  dis- 
mounted men  of  the  cavalry;  and  men 
from  the  battery  reserves  in  the  artil- 
lery.    (112) 

Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  a  wagon  of 
the  train  breaks  down? 

A.  Its  load  is  transferred  to  other  wagons 
and  the  road  cleared  as  soon  as  practi- 
cable.    (112) 

Q.  What  factors  control  the  conduct  of 
forced  marches? 

A.  The  distance  to  be  covered  and  the  time 
in  which  the  march  must  be  accom- 
phshed.     (113) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  forced  marching 
of  foot  troops? 

A.  The  number  of  marching  hours  are  in- 
creased, the  halts  and  periods  for  cook- 
ing being  arranged  so  as  to  derive  the 
greatest  benefit. 
The  rules  for  the  ordinary  march  are  fol- 
lowed as  closely  as  possible. 
For  large  columns  of  infantry  marching 


Night  Operations 


73 


long  distances,  an  increase  of  pace  is 
seldom  advisable. 

The  maximum  day's  march  is  28  to  30 
miles.  The  march  cannot  as  a  rule  be 
prolonged  profitably  more  than  36 
hours. 

Foot  troops  are  favored  in  every  way  pos- 
•  sible.  They  are  assigned  to  the  best 
roads  and  are  not  intermingled  with 
vehicles  or  mounted  men.  If  trans- 
portation is  available,  their  packs  are 
lightened.  (113) 
Q.  What  rules  govern  the  forced  marching 

of  mounted  troops? 
A.  The  gait  as  well  as  the  number  of  march- 
ing hours  may  be  increased. 

A  rate  of  50  miles  in  24  hours  may  be 
maintained  for  several  days. 

In  addition  to  the  usual  halts,  a  special 
halt  of  2  hours  is  made  at  the  end  of 
the  first  half  of  each  day's  march,  dur- 
ing which  time  the  horses  are  unsad- 
dled, permitted  to  roll  and  feed,  and  lie 
down. 

The  rate  is  about  5  miles  an  hour  exclu- 
sive of  halts. 

Under  favorable  conditions,  a  march  of 
100  miles  can  be  made  in  24  to  30  hours. 

If  the  march  is  more  than  150  miles,  the 
marches  begin  at  not  more  than  50 
miles  a  day.  Where  the  distance  is 
more  than  200  miles,  the  length  of 
march  is  reduced  to  30  to  40  miles  a 
day.  (113) 
Q.  With   what   objects  in  view   may  night 

marches  be  made? 
A.  1.  In  very  very  hot  weather,  to  avoid  the 
heat  of  the  day. 

2.  As  a  forced  march,  to  surprise  the  en- 
emy or  to  secure  a  favorable  position 
from  which  he  may  be  attacked  during 
the  night  or  at  dawn.     (114) 
Q.  What  conditions  favor  night  marching? 
A.  Moonlight   and   good   roads.     A   waning 
moon  is  of  advantage  in  marches  be- 
ginning early  in  the  morning.     (114) 
Q,  What  precautions  are  taken  to  keep  the 

right  road  in  night  marches? 
A.  1.  Contact  between  units  is  maintained  at 
all  times. 

2.  Men  are  stationed  to  mark  changes  of 
direction. 

3.  Guides  are  employed. 

4.  When,  due  to  unfavorable  conditions, 
units  cannot  be  kept  well  closed  up, 
men  will  be  placed  at  forks,  road  cross- 


ings, and  at  any  other  point  where  there 
is  any  danger  of  the  units  in  rear  tak- 
ing the  wrong  road.     (114) 

Q.  When  night  marches  are  made  with  se- 
crecy, what  precautions  are  taken? 

A.  Silence  is  maintained;  mouthpieces  of 
bugles  are  removed;  articles  of  equip- 
ment are  secured  to  prevent  rattling; 
smoking  is  prohibited ;  villages  and 
farmhouses  are  avoided  on  account  of 
the  warning  that  may  be  given  by  bark- 
ing dogs.     (114y 

Q.  In  night  marches  where  do  the  mounted 
troops  march? 

A.  They  ordinarily  march  in  rear  of  the  in- 
fantry.    (114) 

Q.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  term  "  con- 
voy "  ? 

A.  On  land,  the  term  "  convoy "  is  usually 
applied  to  the  trains  by  which  supplies 
are  forwarded  from  depots  or  maga- 
zines in  rear  to  an  army ;  and  to  trains 
bringing  in  supplies  collected  by  re- 
quisition.    (115) 

Q.  What  is  the  limit  as  to  sise  for  wagon 
convoys? 

A.  It  should  not,  as  a  rule,  contain  more  than 
100  wagons.     (116) 

Q.  Into  what  elements  is  a  wagon  convoy 
divided? 

A.  Into  sections  of  20  to  30  wagons  each.  A 
noncommissioned  officer  or  wagon  mas- 
ter is  placed  in  charge  of  each  section. 
(116) 

Q.  What  is  the  distance  between  elements  in 
a  convoy? 

A.  About  25  yards  between  sections  and 
about  2  yards  between  wagons.     (117) 

Q.  How  is  security  for  a  convoy  provided? 

A.  By  the  escort ;  usually  composed  of  in- 
fantry, with  enough  cavalry  for  scout- 
ing and  communication,  and  some  engi- 
neer troops.     (118) 

Q.  Upon  what  factors  does  the  convoy  es- 
cort depend? 

A.  Upon  the  importance  and  size  of  the 
train,  the  risk,  nature  of  the  country, 
length  of  the  journey,  etc.  A  train 
containing  explosives  requires  a  strong 
escort  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  firing 
into  it.     (118) 

Q.  What  is  the  distribution  of  troops  in  the 
convoy? 

A.  1.  Military  police  assigned  to  the  differ- 
ent sections  of  the  convoy. 
2.  The  advance  guard. 


74 


Night  Operations 


3.  The  main  body. 

4.  Such  flank  guards  as  may  be  necessary. 

5.  The  rear  guard.     (119) 

Q.  What  are  the  functions  of  the  advance 
guard  of  the  escort f 

A.  The  advance  cavalry  precedes  the  train  3 
to  5  miles,  scouting  to  the  front  and 
flanks.  Careful  examination  is  made 
of  bridges,  defiles  and  the  country  in 
the  vicinity.  Temporary  guards  are 
left  at  such  points  until  the  advance 
guard  comes  up.  The  remainder  of  the 
advance  guard  marches  in  normal  ad- 
vance-guard formation  about  a  mile 
in  front  of  the  train.    (119) 

Q.  Where  does  the  main  body  of  the  escort 
march? 

A.  At  the  most  important  point,  usually  op- 
posite the  center  of  the  train.     (119) 

Q.  What  are  the  general  rules  regarding  the 
camping  of  the  convoy  and  escort? 

A.  The  place  for  camping  is  usually  selected 
by  the  advance  guard  commander,  due 
regard  being  paid  to  water  supply,  fuel, 
grass,  and  facilities  for  defense.  A 
field  inclosed  by  a  wire  fence  is  advan- 
tageous. 
The  train  is  parked,  the  formation  de- 
pending upon  the  proximity  and  charac- 
ter of  the  enemy  and  the  amount  of 
ground  available.  When  the  enemy  is 
at  a  distance  the  train  is  usually  parked 
in  column  of  sections  or  half  sections 
with  distances  of  about  20  yards  be- 
tween subdivisions,  and  intervals  of  6 
to  8  yards  between  wagons.  A  com- 
pact formation  is  secured  by  placing  the 
wagons  axle  to  axle  and  tying  the  ani- 
mals to  picket  lines  in  front  of  the  wag- 
ons. For  purposes  of  defense,  wagons 
may  be  placed  in  two  lines  facing  each 
other  in  the  form  of  a  square,  rectangle, 
oval,  or  circle,  the  poles  inside.  The 
enclosure  thus  formed  furnishes  shel- 
ter for  the  men  and  animals  inside. 
When  there  is  time,  wire  entanglements 
are  constructed  and  shelter  trenches 
dug  outside  the  corral.     (120) 

Q.  Describe  the  forming  of  the  diamond  cor- 
ral and  state  its  advantages? 

A.  It  is  formed  as  the  wagons  successively 
arrive  on  the  ground.  If  the  nature  of 
the  ground  permits,  the  teams  of  the 
first  two  sections  may  countermarch 
before  forming  the  corral,  thus  obviat- 


ing the  necessity  of  unhitching.  The 
advantages  are  that  it  can  be  rapidly 
formed  and  the  march  quickly  resumed. 
(120) 

Q.  What  are  the  most  vulnerable  parts  of  a 
convoy? 

A.  The  flanks.     (121) 

Q.  What  tactics  are  employed  by  the  escort? 

A.  1.  The  chief  duty  of  the  escort  is  to  keep 
the  enemy  from  gaining  a  position  per- 
mitting effective  fire  on  the  train. 

2.  The  escort  fights  only  when  necessary, 
and  does  not  pursue  when  the  enemy  is 
repulsed. 

3.  If  the  enemy  is  reported  near,  the  wag- 
ons are  closed  up  and  the  march  is  con- 
tinued in  the  most  orderly  manner  pos- 
sible. If  practicable,  the  wagons  are 
formed  in  double  column. 

4.  If  the  enemy  holds  a  commanding  po- 
sition or  a  defile  on  the  line  of  march, 
he  is  either  dislodged  by  the  escort  or 
the  convoy  takes  another  road. 

5.  The  advance  cavalry  reports  the  pres- 
ence of  the  enemy  with  the  utmost  dis- 
patch so  that  the  commander  may 
change  the  direction  of  the  march, 
park  the  train  or  make  a  retreat. 

6.  If  menaced  by  small  parties  of  the  en- 
emy, the  convoy  continues  its  march 
under  the  protection  of  the  escort  If 
attacked  by  a  superior  force,  the  train 
is  parked  or  a  corral  formed.  Skirmish- 
ers are  thrown  out  to  delay  the  enemy 
and  gain  time  for  the  formation.  If 
possible,  a  defensive  position  at  some 
distance  from  the  train  is  intrenched 
and  prepared  for  stubborn  resistance. 
Word  is  sent  to  the  nearest  troops. 
Should  the  enemy  be  repulsed,  his  re- 
treat is  carefully  verified  before  the 
march  is  resumed.  If  it  is  evident  that 
the  train  cannot  be  saved,  the  com- 
mander escapes  with  the  most  valuable 
part,  the  remainder  being  destroyed. 
(121) 

Q.  What  is  the  most  favorable  time  for  at- 
tacking a  convoy? 

A.  When  it  is  passing  through  woods,  a  de- 
file, over  a  bridge;  when  it  is  going 
around  a  sharp  bend  in  a  road ;  when 
it  is  ascending  or  descending  difficult 
slopes  or  passing  over  bad  sections  of 
road ;  when  it  is  beginning  to  form  cor- 
ral ;  when  teams  are  being  watered ;  or, 


Night  Operations 


75 


generally,  whenever  the  conditions  are 
such  that  the  escort  cannot  quickly  pre- 
pare for  defense.     (122) 

Q.  What  tactics  are  employed  in  attacking 
a  convoy? 

A.  The  attacking  force  endeavors  to  bring 
the  convoy  to  a  halt  and  to  throw  it 
into  confusion  by  making  an  attack 
from  an  unexpected  quarter.  The  fire 
of  artillery  and  machine  guns  is  very 
effective.     (122) 

Q.  What  methods  are  employed  in  the  con- 
duct of  a  convoy  of  prisoners? 

A.  In  addition  to  a  guard  to  prevent  at- 
tempts at  rescue,  a  guard  of  about  10 
foot  soldiers  and  several  mounted  men 
is  required  for  every  100  prisoners. 
The  prisoners  are  formed  in  companies 
and  marched  in  column,  their  officers 
marching  separately.  Prisoners  are 
treated  kindly,  but  they  must  be  given 
to  understand  that  any  attempt  to  es- 
cape will  draw  fire.  If  the  convoy  is 
attacked,  they  are  ordered  to  lie  down. 
At  night  they  are  placed  in  well-lighted 
buildings  or  enclosures.     (123) 

Q.  What  methods  are  employed  for  the  con- 
voy of  boats  on  interior  waterways? 

A.  For  protection  against  guerillas  and  raid- 
ing parties,  a  shallow  draft  steamboat, 
provided  with  machine  guns  and  shelter 
against  rifle  fire,  carries  part  of  the  es- 
cort and  precedes  the  convoy.  Means 
for  rapidly  disembarking  the  escort  is 
provided  in  order  that  hostile  parties 
on  shore  may  be  dislodged.  In  case  of 
narrow  streams,  or  canals,  lined  with 
woods  or  other  cover,  it  may  be  neces- 
sary to  have  the  escort  march  on  both 
banks  and  clear  the  country  as  it  ad- 
vances.    (124) 

Shelter 

Q.  Under  the  varying  conditions  of  the  serv- 
ice how  are  troops  sheltered? 

A.  In  time  of  peace  troops  in  the  field  are 
generally  sheltered  under  canvas.  In 
local  insurrections,  riot  or  disorder, 
public  buildings  in  the  disturbed  dis- 
trict may  be  used,  when  other  shelter 
is  not  provided.  Private  buildings  are 
not  entered  without  the  owner's  con- 
sent, except  in  the  performance  of 
duty.     (232) 

Q.  Under  what  conditions  is  seizure  of  build- 
ing^ made  for  shelter? 


A.  In  enemy  territory,  public  and  private 
buildings  may  be  used  to  shelter  troops 
and  for  other  mihtary  purposes.  When 
these  buildings  are  to  be  taken  for 
shelter,  the  civil  authorities  should  be 
consulted  and  satisfactory  arrange- 
ments made.  Families  are  not  to  be  re- 
moved from  their  dwellings  if  it  can 
be  avoided.     (232) 

Q.  Distinguish  between  the  terms  "  camp," 
"  bivouac  "  and  "  cantonment "? 

A,  When  troops  are  sheltered  under  canvas, 
they  are  in  camp. 
When  they  rest  on  the  ground  without 

shelter,  they  are  in  bivouac. 
When  they  occupy  buildings  in  towns  and 
villages     or     occupy     huts     specially 
erected,  they  are  in  cantonment.    (233) 

Q.  To  what  conditions  are  cantonments  espe- 
cially adapted? 

A.  1.  During  prolonged  suspension  of  hos- 
tilities. 

2.  When   enemy  territory   is   occupied. 

3.  During  sieges.     (233) 

Q.  What  is  meant  by  "  billeting  "? 

A.  The  assignment  of  troops  to  public  and 
private  buildings  for  quarters.     (234) 

Q.  What  conditions  should  mobilization  and 
concentration  camps  fulfill? 

A.  1.  The  grounds  should  be  easily  drained, 
naturally  healthful  and  large  enough 
for  depots,  corrals,  hospitals,  etc.,  and 
the  encampment  of  the  troops  without 
crowding  and  with  ample  space  for  ex- 
ercise and  instruction. 

2.  The  water  supply  should  be  excellent 
and  abundant  and  not  liable  to  con- 
tamination from  any  source. 

3.  There  should  be  ample  railroad  and 
switching  facilities,  and  suitable  ar- 
rangements for  loading  and  unloading. 

4.  All  parts  of  the  camp  should  be  easily 
accessible  by  good  roads.    (236) 

Q.  What  arrangements  are  made  for  the 
shelter  of  troops  before  they  arrive  at 
a  mobilization  or  concentration  camp? 

A.  1.  Camps  are  laid  out  so  as  to  preserve 
the  integrity  of  units. 

2.  Tents  are  pitched  and  aligned. 

3.  Kitchens  are  equipped  and  arrange- 
ments made  for  the  water  and  fuel 
supply. 

4.  Latrines  are  prepared. 

5.  Hospitals  are  erected. 


76 


Night  Operations 


6.  Arrangements  for  mail,  telegraph,  and 
telephone  service. 

7.  Depots     and     storehouses     are     con- 
structed.    (236) 

Q.  What  rules  govern  the  shelter  and  supply 
of  troops  in  active  campaign f 

A.  If  troops  are  actually  engaged  in  field 
operations,  their  equipment,  including 
tentage,  is  limited  to  that  carried  on  the 
men  and  animals  and  in  the  trains.  In 
certain  instances,  local  buildings  may 
be  used. 
If  the  length  of  a  halt  is  to  be  consider- 
able, when  practicable  additional  camp 
equipment,  baggage,  tents,  surplus  kits, 
etc.,  are  sent  forward  and  placed  at  the 
disposition  of  organizations  to  the  end 
that  the  troops  may  be  made  as  com- 
fortable as  possible  during  the  halt. 
(237) 

Q.  What  requisites  should  camp  sites  in  war 
fulfill  when  tactical  considerations  are 
not  paramount? 

A.  1.  The  ground  should  accommodate  the 
command  with  as  little  crowding  as  pos- 
sible, be  easily  drained,  and  have  no 
stagnant  water  within  300  yards. 

2.  The    water    supply    should    be    ample, 

pure  and  accessible. 

3.  There  should  be  good  roads  to  camp 
and  good  interior  communication. 

4.  Wood,  grass,  forage  and  supplies  must 
be  at  hand  or  easily  obtainable.     (238) 

Q.  What  classes  of  ground  make  the  best 
camp  sites? 

A.  Closely  cropped  turf  with  sandy  or 
gravelly  subsoil ;  high  banks  of  rivers, 
provided  no  marshes  are  near,  are  suit- 
able. In  hot  summer  months,  the 
ground  selected  should  be  high,  free 
from  underbrush,  and  shaded  with  trees 
if  possible.  In  cold  weather  ground 
sloping  to  the  south  with  woods  to 
break  the  north  winds  is  desirable. 
(238) 

Q.  What  classes  of  ground  should  be  avoided 
in  the  selection  of  camp  sites? 

A.  Old  camp  grounds  and  ground  in  the 
vicinity  of  cemeteries  is  undesirable. 
Marshy  ground  and  ground  near  stag- 
nant water  is  to  be  avoided.  Thick 
forests,  dense  vegetation,  made  ground, 
alluvial  soil,  punch-bowl  depressions, 
inclosed  ravines,  and  dry  beds  of 
streams  are  unfavorable  camp  sites. 
(238) 


Q,  What  rules  govern  the  form  and  dimen- 
sion of  camps? 

A.  The  form  of  a  camp  should  be  such  as  to 
facilitate  the  prompt  encampment  of 
troops  after  a  march  and  their  prompt 
departure  when  camp  is  broken.  It 
will  depend  upon  the  tactical  situation 
and  the  amount  of  ground  available. 
In  one  night  halts  in  the  presence  of 
the  enemy,  camps  must  of  necessity  be 
contracted.  Where  a  more  protracted 
halt  is  contemplated  and  where  the  tac- 
tical situation  permits,  a  more  com- 
fortable arrangement  may  be  made  by 
the  expansion  of  the  camp.     (239) 

Q.  What  is  the  procedure  in  establishing  a 
camp  in  campaign? 

A.  A  staff  officer,  accompanied  by  representa- 
tives from  each  command,  precedes  the 
troops.  Camping  places  are  assigned 
and  the  troops  conducted  thereto,  as 
they  arrive.  The  place  for  procuring 
drinking  and  cooking  water,  for  water- 
ing animals  and  bathing  and  for  wash- 
ing clothing,  in  the  order  named  from 
upstream  down,  are  designated  and 
marked.  On  the  arrival  of  troops, 
guards  are  posted  over  the  water  sup- 
ply. The  interior  camp  guards  are 
posted.  The  remaining  troops  pitch 
their  tents,  make  camp,  establish 
kitchens  and  picket  lines.  In  the  pres- 
ence of  the  enemy,  assembly  places  in 
case  of  attack  are  designated.     (240) 

Q.  What  is  the  procedure  when  troops  are 
billeted? 

A.  Staff  officers  and  representatives  from 
each  unit  precede  the  column.  The 
staff  officer  confers  with  the  civil  au- 
thorities and  makes  an  equitable  dis- 
tribution of  the  quarters  available  and 
assigns  sections  to  each  unit.  The 
troops  are  assigned  to  buildings  by  the 
immediate  representatives.     (241) 

Q.  Under  what  conditions  are  bivouacs  es- 
tablished? 

A.  1.  In  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  such  ac- 
tion may  be  necessary. 
2.  In  fine  weather,  in  midsummer,  or  in 
the    tropics,    the    troops    may   bivouac 
from  choice.     (242) 

Q.  What  precautions  are  taken  in  the  selec- 
tion of  a  bivouac  site? 

A.  The  general  principles  that  govern  in  the 
selection  of  a  camp  site  are  the  same. 
The  ground   should   be   dry  and   pro- 


Night  Operations 


77 


^ 


tected    from    sun    and    wind.      Light 
woods  are  nearly  always  good  sites  for 
infantry  bivouacs   on   account   of   the 
available  shelter  and  material.    (242) 
Q.  What  arrangements  and  rules  govern  the 

sheltering  of  troops  during  battle f 
A.  During  a  lull  in  an  engagement,  or  vvhen 
hostilities  are  suspended  for  the  night, 
•  the  troops  bivouac  in  line  of  battle  on  or 
near  the  position  they  occupy,  the  offi- 
cers in  rear  of  the  center  of  their  units. 
Reserves,    required    to    be    in    instant 
readiness,  generally  bivouac  in  column 
with  a  flank  to  the  front.     (243) 
Q.  How  is  shelter  during  sieges  provided? 
A.  The  main  body  is  some  five  miles  to  the 
rear,  in  camp  or  cantonment.    To  guard 
against  surprise,   a  large   part   of   the 
command  is  continually  on  outpost  and 
when  they  coqiplete  their  tours  of  duty 
the  troops  return  to  their  own  camps. 
(244) 
Q.  What  precautions  are  taken  with  respect 
to    the    sleeping   arrangements   of    the 
men  in  camp  and  bivouac  f 
A.  The  men  should  not  lie  on  the  ground.   In 
temporary  camps  and  in  bivouac,  they 
raise   their   beds   if    suitable   material 
such   as   straw,   leaves   or  boughs   are 
available,  or  use  their  ponchos  or  slick- 
ers.   In  cold  weather  when  fuel  is  plen- 
tiful the  ground   may  be   warmed  by 
fires,  the  men  making  their  beds  after 
raking  away  the  ashes.     (245) 
Q.  What  action  is  taken  when  a  camp  is  to 

be  occupied  for  some  length  of  time? 
A.  All  underbrush  is  cleared  away  and  the 
camp  made  as  comfortable  as  possible. 
Watering  troughs,  shelter  in  cold 
weather,  and  shade  in  hot,  are  provided 
for  the  animals,  if  practicable.  (245) 
Q.  What  is  the  daily  routine  prescribed  for 

troops  in  camps f 
A.  Guard  and  other  routine  duties  follow 
about  the  same  course  as  when  in  gar- 
rison. The  watering,  feeding  and 
grooming  of  animals  take  place  at  reg- 
ular hours  under  the  supervision  of 
officers. 
The  camp  is  policed  daily  after  breakfast 
and  all  refuse  matter  is  burned. 
Weather  permitting,  the  walls  of  tents 
are  raised  and  the  bedding  and  cloth- 
ing aired  daily.     (245) 


Q.  What  precautions  are  taken  with  respect 
to  the  water  supply  of  the  camp? 

A.  1.  The  water  supply  is  carefully  guarded. 
When  several  units  are  camped  along 
the  same  stream,  this  matter  is  regu- 
lated by  the  senior  commander. 

2.  If  the  stream  is  small,  the  supply  may 
be  increased  by  building  dams.  Small 
springs  will  be  dug  out  and  lined  with 
stone  or  brick,  or  empty  barrels  may 
be  sunk  in  them.  Surface  drainage 
may  be  kept  off  by  a  bank  of  clay 
around  the  spring. 

3.  When  sterlized  water  is  not  provided, 
or  when  there  is  doubt  as  to  the  purity 
of  the  water,  it  is  boiled  20  minutes, 
then  cooled  and  aerated.     (245) 

Q.  Where  are  latrines  located? 

A.  Always  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  camp 

from  the  kitchens. 
Q.  What  are  the  general  rules  with  respect 

to  the  class  of  latrines  to  be  provided 

in  the  various  types  of  camps? 
A.  1.  When  the  camp  is  for  one  night  only, 

straddle  trenches  will  suffice. 

2.  In  camps  of  longer  duration,  and  when 
it  is  possible  to  provide  latrine  boxes, 
as  in  permanent  camps,  deeper  trenches 
should  be  dug.  These  may  be  used  as 
straddle  trenches  or  a  box  provided  or 
a  seat  improvised. 

3.  In  more  permanent  camps,  the  trenches 
are  not  over  two  feet  wide,  6  feet 
deep  and  12  feet  long  and  suitably 
screened.  Seats  with  lids  are  provided, 
and  the  boxes  extend  down  to  the 
ground  and  made  flyproof.  Urinal 
troughs,  which  discharge  into  the 
trenches  are  provided.  Latrine  boxes 
are  thoroughly  cleaned  daily.  The 
seats  are  scrubbed.  The  pit  is  burned 
out  with  oil  and  straw  or  hay.  When 
these  latrines  are  filled  within  two  feet 
of  the  surface,  they  are  filled  in  and 
discarded  and  their  position  carefully 
marked.     (245) 

Q.  What  precautions  are  taken  when  open 
trenches  are  used? 

A.  The  excrement  must  be  kept  covered  at 
all  times  with  a  layer  of  earth.  They 
are  always  filled  before  the  march  is 
resumed  the  next  morning.     (245) 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 

Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


TFE^ 


?0-i- 


MAR    9 1968     t 


x,^ 


:5Pfr 


V   ta."-" 


%^ 


^ 


Si 


W 


^ 


^ 


LD  2]A-45m-9,'67 
(H5067sl0)476B 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkelev 


